JP7218278B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing games.

A conventional game machine can execute a battle production and a timer production at the same time as a ready-to-win production, and during the battle production, it is possible to further execute a slow motion production that slows down the playback speed of the battle production. There is a thing (for example, see patent document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-99801

However, in Patent Document 1, if the reproduction speed of the battle effect is slowed down as the slow motion effect, the progress speed of the timer effect is also slowed down, which causes the player to feel uncomfortable. be.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from feeling uncomfortable.

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
sound output means;
display means;
light emitting means;
a production executing means capable of executing production;
with
The effect executing means is capable of executing a specific effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled,
The display means includes a first display area and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area,
The specific production is
The display means displays a moving image, the sound output means outputs a sound effect, and the light emitting means emits light,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period, in which either an advantageous aspect or a disadvantageous aspect is notified as a result of the production. including
The production executing means is
The effect moving image can be displayed in the first display area,
In the second display area, it is possible to display information display related to the game,
In the first period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at a first speed in the first display area ,
In the second period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed in the first display area . ,
It is possible to execute a still effect of stopping the effect moving image as a result of progressing the effect moving image at the second speed,
In the third period,
When an advantageous mode is notified as a result of the effect, the first display area and the second display area are used without displaying the information display that was displayed in the second display area during the second period. It is possible to notify the effect result of the advantageous mode,
When notifying a disadvantageous aspect as the effect result, the effect result of the disadvantageous aspect is notified using the first display area while the information display that was displayed in the second display area during the second period is displayed. is possible and
In both the first period and the second period, the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed,
In both the first period and the second period, it is possible to change the light emission mode of the light emitting means, and in the second period, the light emitting means emits light at an interval shorter than that in the first period. It is possible to change the light emission mode ,
It is possible to execute a reach effect that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
A special effect can be executed after starting the reach effect,
The operating means is operated at a plurality of timings including a first timing corresponding to the start of the variable display in which the ready-to-win effect is executed and a second timing before the start of the variable display in which the ready-to-win effect is executed. It is possible to execute a predetermined vibration effect to vibrate,
There are a plurality of production modes of the static production, and the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which production mode it is,
A gaming machine characterized by:
The game machine of means 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Effect executing means (for example, Production control CPU 120) and
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
moreover,
Operation means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
As the vibration effects for vibrating the operating means, a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation part effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, by vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern) (such as driving the vibration motor 131) can be executed (for example, the vibration control data of the operation section effect control pattern or the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 is used to perform the variable display effect in step S172. Production control CPU 120 for executing processing, etc.),
Light-emitting effect execution means (for example, in step AKS203) capable of executing a light-emitting effect (for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern) that causes the operation means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect Effect control CPU 120 etc.) that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern determined by
A specific effect execution means (for example, based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute a specific effect (for example, reach effect of SP reach A, notification of jackpot determination, jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game Effect control CPU 120 etc.) that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172,
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (for example, the reliability of the big hit according to the operation part effect pattern, etc.),
Depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of control to the advantageous state differs (for example, the light emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern jackpot reliability according to the application of the operation part production pattern, etc.),
The vibration performance execution means can execute the special vibration performance in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance (for example, execution of vibration performance in periods AKZ01 to AKZ05),
Vibration modes differ between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, the game interest can be improved by making the player pay attention to the vibration mode of the vibration performance, the light emission mode of the light emission performance, and the execution timing of the vibration performance.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include an invention relating to a game machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in game machines, there has been a technique of providing a vibrating means in a ball shooting handle, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-38019. However, in such a gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in improving the excitement of the presentation by vibration, and in view of this point, provision of a gaming machine that enhances the entertainment of the game when executing the presentation by vibration is desired. ing.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) that is advantageous to a player,
Operation means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
As the vibration effects for vibrating the operating means, a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation part effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, by vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern) (such as driving the vibration motor 131) can be executed (for example, the vibration control data of the operation section effect control pattern or the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 is used to perform the variable display effect in step S172. Production control CPU 120 for executing processing, etc.),
Light-emitting effect execution means (for example, in step AKS203) capable of executing a light-emitting effect (for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern) that causes the operation means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect Effect control CPU 120 etc.) that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern determined by
A specific effect execution means (for example, based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute a specific effect (for example, reach effect of SP reach A, notification of jackpot determination, jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game Effect control CPU 120 etc.) that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172,
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (for example, the reliability of the big hit according to the operation part effect pattern, etc.),
Depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of control to the advantageous state differs (for example, the light emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern jackpot reliability according to the application of the operation part production pattern, etc.),
The vibration performance execution means can execute the special vibration performance in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance (for example, execution of vibration performance in periods AKZ01 to AKZ05),
The vibration mode differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44, etc.).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the player pay attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. (A) is a diagram showing an image display device, (B) is a diagram showing a rotating display of a pending display in each pending display area, and (C) is a diagram showing moving display of a telop in a telop display area. , (D) are diagrams showing the flashing mode of the fourth symbol. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes display on an image display device; (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a figure which shows the execution determination ratio of a chance up production|presentation. (A) is a diagram showing the decision ratio of the effect pattern of the still image display effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect contents of each effect pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the decision ratio of the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect contents of each effect pattern. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α1. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α2. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β1; FIG. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β2. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β3. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β3. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 1st ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 1st ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 2nd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 2nd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 2nd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 3rd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 3rd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 4th ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 4th ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 4th ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 2nd reach production|presentation in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production|presentation in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production|presentation in a modification. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of stop design decision processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting example regarding a setting suggestion effect execution determination table; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example and a setting example regarding a setting suggestion pattern; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; It is a figure which shows the execution example of setting suggestion production|presentation. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to the characteristic portion 10SH. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine according to the characteristic portion 10SH. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing related to the characteristic portion 10SH; It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of vibration production|presentation, and an example of a big-hit reliability. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution timing of a vibration production|presentation, and a visual guidance production|presentation, and a production|presentation period. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of vibration production|presentation and visual guidance production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of vibration production|presentation and visual guidance production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a rendering device relating to characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK; It is a figure which shows the example of a setting in the case of performing an operation part production|presentation pattern and specific interlocking production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a vibration pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the production|presentation by vibration and light emission. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a continuous production|presentation pattern. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a figure which shows the structural example of a production|presentation control pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting example of timings at which operation section effects can be executed; It is a figure which shows the example of control of operation part production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of control of operation part production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of control of operation part production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of control of operation part production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of control of operation part production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of control of operation part production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the production|presentation which makes a game effect lamp light. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the production|presentation period which can perform specific interlocking production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example in case reach production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example in case reach production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example in case reach production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of music reproduction execution.

A mode for implementing a pachinko game machine, which is a game machine according to the present invention, will be described below based on an embodiment.

[form]
The game machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Effect executing means (for example, Production control CPU 120) and
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM and production sounds are output at V4, which is the normal playback speed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
The sound output means includes a reproduction circuit (for example, an IC079SG132 for speech synthesis) that reproduces sound, an amplifier circuit (for example, an amplifier circuit 079SG134) that amplifies the sound reproduced by the reproduction circuit, and a sound that is amplified by the amplifier circuit. and speakers (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that output sound.
According to this feature, the highly reproducible effect sound can be output from the speaker at an appropriate volume.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 1 or form 2,
The effect executing means can output the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect by the sound output means during a predetermined period of the second period at the same speed as the first period, and In a specific period after the period, the sound output means can output at a speed different from that in the first period (for example, as shown in modification 079SG-1, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the first In the first half of each reach performance second half execution period of the third reach performance and fourth reach performance, the speaker is the same as the first half of each reach performance execution period of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance. While the effect sound is output from 8L and 8R at the reproduction speed V4, in the latter half of each reach effect latter half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, V4. The part that outputs the effect sound at a different playback speed (for example, V5, which is slower than the playback speed V4)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the speed of the sound effect can be changed for a specific period of the second period in which the moving picture effect is displayed at the second speed, so that the effect of the sound effect corresponding to the predetermined effect can be improved. Therefore, the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 3,
The effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect includes music and sound effects (for example, a portion capable of outputting BGM (music) and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R).
According to this feature, the entertainment of the game can be improved by the production sound including the music and the sound effect.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 4,
A light emitting means (for example, a game effect lamp 9) capable of emitting light in at least the first period and the second period and capable of changing the light emitting mode,
The effect executing means can change the light emitting mode of the light emitting means in the second period in a period shorter than that in the first period (for example, FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and As shown in 10-25, during the execution period of the second reach production second half and during the execution period of the fourth reach production latter half, execution periods of the first reach production, the second reach production, and the third reach production and the fourth The part where the game effect lamp 9 blinks at a period shorter than the execution period of the first half of the ready-to-win effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the change period of the light emission mode of the light emitting means becomes shorter (faster) in the second period in which the speed of progress of the presentation is slow, so that the presentation effect in the second period can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 5,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas that can display effect moving images, a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2 (A)) and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
a predetermined effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect) in which a character effect animation is displayed in the first display area and a effect sound is output by the sound output means in accordance with the display of the character effect animation; Information production that operates information display related to variable display (for example, rotating display of the reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), 2 (C) telop movement display in the telop display area 079SG005T) effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
Regarding the information effect, it is possible to execute the information effect in which the information display is operated at the same operation speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIGS. 10-19 to 10- As shown in 25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect, the rotating display of the pending display is rotated at a rotation speed of V3. , the part that displays the moving display of the telop at the moving speed V3)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the operating speed of the information display and the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect change between the first period and the second period. Since it does not change with the period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of form 7 is the gaming machine according to form 6,
The total area of the first display region is larger than the total area of the second display region (for example, as shown in FIG. larger than the combined area of the area of and the third display area 079SG005Sb)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the predetermined presentation rather than the information presentation, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to form 6 or 7,
The effect executing means can execute an information effect that always operates the information display at the same operating speed during at least a period during which variable display is being performed other than the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10). -18 to FIG. 10-25, in the period other than during the ready-to-win effect, the rotating display of the suspended display is executed at the rotation speed V3 in the first suspended memory display area 079SG005D and the second suspended memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop In the display area 079SG005T, the moving display of the telop is executed at the moving speed V3)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the operation speed of the information display does not change, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information presentation.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 6 to 8,
The information effect is a moving display effect for sequentially moving and displaying the information display suggesting the state of the effect in the variable display being executed in the second display area (for example, moving display of a message corresponding to the game state in the telop display area 079SG005T). the part that executes
The effect executing means can execute a moving display effect for moving and displaying the information display so that at least a part of the information display is always visible to the player (for example, in FIG. 10-2(C) As shown, the characters included in the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T at the same time as they reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and are displayed again to the left. (the part that is moved to the right from
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since at least part of the information display is always visible to the player, the player can easily recognize that the moving display effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sounds, such as speakers 8L and 8R and voice synthesis IC079SG132, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on voice control board 13,
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ) and a notification effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a deviation notification effect) for notifying whether or not a privilege is given after the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, effect control CPU 120). ,
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
During the second period, it is possible to execute an effect rendering that is different from the predetermined rendering and is for enhancing the rendering effect of the predetermined rendering (for example, FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and FIG. As shown in 10-28, the part that executes the effect production of displaying the concentration line on the image display device 5 in the second reach production latter half execution period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, further enhance the performance effect in the second period, and allow the player to recognize by the effect performance that the second period is over and the notification performance is to be executed. can be done easily.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to form 10,
The production executing means is
The effect production is performed in a plurality of modes with different degrees of effectiveness for enhancing the production effect of the predetermined production (for example, a mode in which the concentration line shown in FIG. 10-28 (C) is displayed, and As shown in FIG. 10-28 (C), it can be executed in a mode in which the number of displayed concentration lines is larger than that in FIG.
As the second period progresses from the start point to the end point, it is possible to execute the effect rendering in which the degree of effect of enhancing the rendering effect increases sequentially (for example, FIGS. 10-28 (C) and 10-28 ( As shown in D), the portion where the number of displayed concentration lines increases as the battle effect progresses)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the mode of the effect production changes to a mode in which the degree of effect of increasing the effect of the predetermined production is successively increased, the execution of the notification production after the second period ends is played by the effect production. make it easier for people to recognize

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 11,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas that can display effect moving images, a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2 (A)) and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-reach effect), a notification effect for notifying whether or not a privilege is given after the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a loss notification effect), and specific information related to variable display in the second display area. Effect (for example, the rotating display of the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), and the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2 (C) Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing telop movement display),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the A part where the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a effect moving image whose progression speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect progresses at a speed The part displayed on the image display device 5 in V2),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- As shown in 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, and during the execution period of the latter half of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
The notification effect can be executed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, FIGS. 10-26 (G), 10-29 (E), 10-30 (D), FIG. 10-31 (G), as shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), when the decorative symbols stop with a combination of a big hit as a big hit notification effect, the big hit occurs in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. The part that displays the image of the notification effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and furthermore, by executing the notification effect in a wide display area including the first display area and the second display area, it is possible to notify that the privilege has been given. It can be easily recognized by the player.

Form 13 is the gaming machine according to Form 12,
The production executing means is
A first display that operates within the second display area (for example, a reserved display) and a second display that does not operate within the second display area (for example, a first reserved storage display area 079SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 079SG005U). ) can be displayed in the specific information presentation,
The notification effect can be executed in the second display area where the first display and the second display are erased (for example, FIGS. 10-26 (G), 10-29 (E), 10-30 (D), FIG. 10-31 (G), as shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), when executing the jackpot notification effect, the suspension display and the first suspension storage display area 079SG005D, the second suspension storage display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the image of the big hit notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the notification effect is executed in the second display area in which not only the first display that operates but also the second display that does not operate are erased, so that the visibility of the notification effect in the second display area is further enhanced. be able to.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 13,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas capable of displaying effect moving images, a first display area (for example, first display area 079SG005F), a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, second display area 079SG005Sa), a display means (for example, an image display device 5) including
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a ready-to-win effect), a notification effect for notifying whether or not a privilege is awarded after the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a loss notification effect), and an information effect related to variable display in the second display area. (For example, the rotating display of the suspended display in the first suspended storage display area 079SG005D and the second suspended storage display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), or the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the movement display of
with
The display means can change the visibility of the first display area and the second display area (for example, as shown in the modification 079SG-2, in addition to the first display area 079SG005F, the second display area A portion that can reduce the visibility of the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb),
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the A part where the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a effect moving image whose progression speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect is progressing speed The part displayed on the image display device 5 in V2),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
In the pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined effect to the execution of the notification effect, the visibility of the first display area changes but the visibility of the second display area does not change (for example, modification 079SG -2, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and the change in the visibility of the first display area in the pre-notification period allows the player to easily recognize the timing at which the notification effect is executed. Also, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information presentation because the visibility of the second display area does not change.

Form 15 is the gaming machine according to Form 14,
The display means is means capable of generating an image to be displayed, and includes a first drawing layer (for example, second image data) capable of drawing an image to be displayed in the first display area, and an image generation means (for example, display including a control unit 123),
The visibility of the first display area is changed by changing the visibility of the image drawn in the first drawing layer by the image generating means (for example, as shown in Modification 079SG-2, the second image data A portion that changes the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F by enlarging and displaying the effect image 079SG005Ea drawn as the image of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to accurately change only the visibility of the first display area without changing the visibility of the second display area.

Form 16 is the gaming machine according to form 15,
The image generation means adjusts the visibility of the image to be drawn in the first drawing layer from a specific position away from the area corresponding to the second display area in the first drawing layer to the area corresponding to the second display area. over a predetermined period (for example, as shown in the modification 079SG-2, the effect image 079SG005Ea drawn as the image of the second image data is drawn from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa and a part that changes the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F by drawing so as to enlarge and display toward the third display area 079SG005Sb)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the change in visibility of the first rendering layer changes over a predetermined period from the specific position toward the area corresponding to the second display area. The visibility of the area can be made difficult to change.

Form 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 14 to 16,
Equipped with motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the motion of the player,
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute the notification effect based on the detection of the action of the player by the action detection means (for example, control to the big win game state based on the operation of the push button 31B by the player, or parts that can signal that they are not controlled by the state),
An action promoting effect (for example, an operation promoting effect) that prompts a player to act by displaying an action promoting image for executing the notification effect in the first display area is executable,
Although the visibility of the effect moving image of the predetermined effect decreases, the visibility of the action promotion effect does not decrease (for example, the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, but the visibility of the first image The part where the visibility of the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as an image of data does not decrease)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the action promoting effect stand out from the predetermined effect, so that the player can be effectively encouraged to perform the action.

Form 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 17,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas that can display effect moving images, a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2 (A)) and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect), a notification effect for informing whether or not a privilege is given after the predetermined effect is completed, and an information effect for operating information display related to the variable display in the second display area (for example, FIG. 10- 2 (B) shown in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U rotating display of the reserved display, and movement display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2 (C)) Possible effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the A part where the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a effect moving image whose progression speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect is progressing speed The part displayed on the image display device 5 in V2),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
In a pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined effect to the execution of the notification effect, a pre-notification effect of displaying a specific still image corresponding to the stoppage of progress of the predetermined effect being executed in the first display area. (For example, still image display effect) can be executed,
The information display operation in the second display area continues even in the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21, the first suspension Part where rotating display of reserved display in memory display area 079SG005D and second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and moving display of telop in telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C) continue)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Furthermore, the player can recognize that the notification effect will be executed by displaying the specific still image in the first display area in the pre-notification period. In addition, since the information display operation in the second display area continues, it is possible to prevent the information presentation from becoming difficult to recognize due to the information display operation being stopped.

Form 19 is the gaming machine according to form 18,
The specific still image is an image obtained by changing the color of the static image of the predetermined effect whose progress has been stopped (for example, As shown, the part where the color of the still image is inverted by executing the still image display effect in pattern SG-2)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the specific still image displayed in the first display area is different in color from the still image of the predetermined effect, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize that the notification effect will be executed.

Form 20 is the gaming machine according to form 19,
Regarding the image of the information effect displayed in the second display area, the color does not change in the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. 2, the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed, but the suspended display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb are displayed. The part where the color of the 4th pattern that is attached is not reversed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information effect when the pre-notification effect is executed (since the color of the image of the information effect does not change, the color does not change). It is possible to easily recognize that it is a specific still image).

Form 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 20,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
a display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a moving image,
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), and an effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a deviation notification effect) for informing whether or not a privilege is given after the execution of the predetermined effect,
with
The predetermined effect includes a first section (e.g., first reach effect and third reach effect) and a second section (e.g., second reach effect and fourth reach effect) after the first section,
Each of the first section and the second section is a first period (for example, the first half of the ready-to-reach effect first half execution period, the first half of the second ready-to-win effect part of the execution period, the first half of the third ready-to-win effect part of the executing period, and the fourth ready-to-reach effect. production first half execution period) and a second period after the first period (for example, first reach production second half execution period, second reach production second half execution period, third reach production second half execution period, fourth Reach production second half execution period) and
The production executing means is
In the first period, the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. A part in which moving images of each ready-to-win effect are displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
During the second period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25 , the second half of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect are displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the animation of each ready-to-win effect. ),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
The predetermined effect is a first pattern that shifts to the second section after the execution of the first section (for example, variable display of super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21, and FIG. Variable display of super reach β3 shown in 10-25) and a second pattern that ends without transitioning to the second section after execution of the first section (for example, super reach shown in FIGS. 10-18 and 10-19 variable display of α1 and super reach α2, and variable display of super reach β1 and super reach β2 shown in FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23).
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Further, the predetermined performance is executed at the second speed in the first section and the predetermined performance is executed without shifting to the second section or the transition to the second section is performed. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the game is finished and whether or not the privilege is given by executing the predetermined performance at the second speed in the second section, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 21,
The production executing means is
An end suggestion effect suggesting that the predetermined effect ends in the first interval without transitioning to the second interval (for example, during the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect and the second half of the third reach effect) is defeated by an enemy character) can be executed,
The end-suggesting effect and the predetermined effect when transitioning from the first section to the second section can be executed at the same progress speed (for example, FIGS. 10-19, 10-20, and 10-21 , FIGS. 10-23, 10-24, and 10-25, during the second half execution period of the first reach production and the second half execution period of the third reach production, the production in which the friendly character is knocked down by the enemy character and the first A portion where the reach performance second half execution period or the third reach performance second half execution period is executed at the progress speed V1),
When notifying that a privilege is given in the notification effect, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the third speed in the first notification period of the notification effect, and In the second notification period after the first notification period, the effect moving image, which is the fourth speed slower than the third speed, can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIGS. 10-18, 10-20, and 10 -22, Figure 10-24, Figure 10-25 and Figure 10-26 (E) to Figure 10-26 (G), Figure 10-29 (C) to Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 ( B) ~ Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (E) ~ Figure 10-31 (G), Figure 10-35 (A) ~ Figure 10-35 (C), as shown in A portion that displays a moving image when an enemy character falls down due to a hit with an attack at a progress speed of V2),
When notifying that the privilege is not given in the notification effect, the effect moving image of the third speed can be displayed on the display means without displaying the effect moving image of the fourth speed during the second notification period. There are (for example, FIGS. -30 (H), Figures 10-32 (E) to Figure 10-32 (G), Figures 10-35 (D) to Figure 10-35 (F), animation when the friendly character falls down The part where the display is executed at the progress speed V1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the progress speed of the predetermined performance when shifting to the second section is the same as the progress speed of the end suggesting performance, the progress speed when shifting to the second section is the same as the progress speed of the end suggesting performance. By being different, it is possible to prevent excessively increasing expectations for the granting of the privilege, and when it is notified that the privilege will not be granted, the fourth-speed effect moving image is not displayed. Since it is possible to prevent the player's dissatisfaction from becoming excessively high, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 22,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
Action detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting actions of the player;
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), an action-promoting effect (for example, an operation-promoting effect) that prompts the player to act, and a notification effect (for example, , jackpot notification effect and loss notification effect) and effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
When the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is being displayed at the second speed in the second period, the action promotion effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25, the 4 Part where the operation promotion effect is executed when the display of the animation of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of the reach effect)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incompatibility, and furthermore, since the predetermined performance progresses at the second speed during execution of the action promotion performance during the second period, the performance effect of the predetermined performance can be enhanced. can.

The gaming machine of form 24 is the gaming machine according to form 23,
The action promotion effect includes an effective detection period notification effect (for example, display of a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation succession period of the push button 31B) for notifying the effective detection period for receiving the detection of the player's action by the action detection means. ,
When the validity detection period ends, the effect execution means detects the action of the player by the action detection means within the validity detection period from the timing after the end of the validity detection period. 10-33 (E), 10-34 (E), and 10-35 (A) to 10-35 (F), the same notification effect can be executed A part that executes the same jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect based on the end of the operation acceptance period of the button 31B or the player's operation of the push button 31B)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, when the action detection means does not detect the action of the player, the notification effect is not executed at the timing before the valid detection period elapses, so the action detection means detects the action of the player. By not doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the privilege is granted during the validity detection period.

The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 24,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), an effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a notification effect that is not a big hit notification effect) for notifying whether or not a privilege is given after the predetermined effect is completed;
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
When notifying that a privilege is given in the notification effect, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the third speed in the first notification period of the notification effect, and In the second notification period after the first notification period, the effect moving image, which is the fourth speed slower than the third speed, can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIGS. 10-18, 10-20, and 10 -22, figures 10-24 and figures 10-26 (E) to figures 10-26 (G), figures 10-29 (C) to figures 10-29 (E), figures 10-30 (B) to figures 10 -30 (D), Figures 10-31 (E) to Figure 10-31 (G), Figures 10-35 (A) to Figure 10-35C), the attack of the ally character in the big hit notification effect The animation of the portion where hits the enemy character is displayed at a progressing speed of V1, while the animation of the portion where the enemy character falls down is displayed at a progressing speed of V2),
When notifying that the privilege is not given in the notification effect, the effect moving image of the third speed can be displayed on the display means without displaying the effect moving image of the fourth speed during the second notification period. There are (for example, FIGS. -30 (H), Figures 10-32 (E) to Figure 10-32 (G), Figures 10-35 (D) to Figure 10-35 (F), as shown in Figures 10-35 (D) to Figure 10-35 (F), the moving speed The part displayed in V1)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and furthermore, when the provision of the privilege is notified as the notification performance, the performance moving image with the progress speed of the fourth speed is displayed, so that the privilege is granted. It is possible to impress the player with the performance moving image of the notification performance.

The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to form 25,
The effect execution means performs a special effect during the second period only when a privilege is granted (for example, a still image display effect in which the color of the still image is inverted as shown in FIGS. 10-16 (pattern SG- 2. Still image display effect))).
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the special effect is executed.

The gaming machine of form 27 is the gaming machine according to form 26,
The privilege providing means provides a first privilege (for example, a non-variable big hit jackpot game state) as the privilege and a second privilege (for example, a probability variable big win big hit game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. is grantable and
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect (for example, a resurrection effect shown in Modification 079SG-4) for notifying that a privilege will be granted after once notifying that the privilege will not be granted in the notification effect. ,
When the special effect is executed during the second period and it is notified that the privilege is granted in the notification effect, the second privilege is granted (for example, as shown in modification 079SG-4, When the static image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 and the big hit notification effect is executed, the part controlled to the big hit game state of the probability variable big win),
When the special performance is executed during the second period and the special performance is executed after the notification performance informs that the privilege is not granted, the first privilege or the second privilege is granted. (For example, as shown in the modification 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 and the resurrection effect is executed after the deviation notification effect is executed, the non-probable variable jackpot Part where there is a case where it is controlled to the game state and a case where it is controlled to the jackpot game state of the probability variable jackpot)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, after the special effect is executed, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the provision of the privilege is notified by the notification effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 28 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 27,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
Action detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting actions of the player;
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), and a first action-promoting image (for example, an operation-promoting image 079SG005Ba) and a second action-promoting image (for example, an operation-promoting image 079SG005Bb) different from the first action-promoting image. is displayed on the display means to prompt the player's action (for example, an operation promotion effect), and whether or not the privilege is given based on the detection of the player's action by the action detection means is determined. Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect to be notified (for example, a big hit notification effect and a losing notification effect);
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
After the start of the second period, the operation promotion effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25, the operation promotion effect is executed during the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect part),
When the action-promoting effect is executed by the first action-promoting image, the first action-promoting image is displayed while visibly displaying the effect moving image of the predetermined effect on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-33). As shown, when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed, the effect image 079SG005E having transparency is also displayed, so that the player can visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E).
When the action promoting effect is executed by the second action promoting image, the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is displayed on the display means so that the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is more difficult to see than when the first action promoting image is displayed. , displaying the second action-promoting image in a display area wider than the display area of the first action-promoting image (for example, as shown in FIG. is displayed, since the transparency of the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is 0%, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed),
The rate at which the privilege is given when the second action promoting image is displayed is higher than when the first action promoting image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-17, the operation promoting image 079SG005Bb The ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit when is displayed is lower than the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and to make the player pay attention to whether the first action promotion image or the second action promotion image is displayed as the action promotion effect. It can improve amusement interest.

The gaming machine of form 29 is the gaming machine according to form 28,
The effect executing means is capable of displaying, on the display means, the effect moving image of the predetermined effect whose progress speed is the second speed while the first action promoting image is being displayed (for example, FIG. 10-24, FIG. 10-25 and FIGS. 10-33(C) to 10-33(E), when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed as the operation prompting effect, a battle effect is displayed while the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is being displayed. The part where the display of the effect animation is executed at the progress speed V2)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, since the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is displayed at the second speed while the first action promoting image is being displayed, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 30 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 29,
The production executing means is
A first predetermined effect (for example, a first ready-to-reach effect and a third ready-to-reach effect) and a second predetermined effect (for example, a second ready-to-reach effect and a fourth ready-to-reach effect) can be executed as the predetermined effect, and the first After the execution of the first specific section (for example, the first reach production first half execution period and the third reach production first half execution period) in the predetermined production, the second specific section after the first specific section (for example, the first reach It is possible to shift to the second half of the production execution period and the third reach production second half execution period),
The predetermined effect is a first specific pattern (for example, super reach α1 shown in FIGS. and variable display of super reach β1 shown in FIG. 10-22), and a second specific pattern (for example, , variable display of super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 and super reach β3 shown in FIGS. A third specific pattern (for example, variable display of super reach α2 shown in FIG. 10-19 or variable display of super reach β2 shown in FIG. 10-23) that ends the predetermined effect after execution of two specific sections, and is executable and
When shifting from the first specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second specific section and when shifting from the second specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second predetermined effect, the performance Display the effect moving image whose progress speed is the second speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. When shifting to the execution period, when shifting from the first half of the ready-to-win production second half execution period to the first half of the second ready-to-win production execution period, when shifting from the third half of the ready-to-win production first half execution period to the second half of the third ready-to-win production execution period. , a portion for executing the effect animation of each ready-to-win effect at the progress speed V2 when shifting from the third ready-to-reach effect second half part execution period to the fourth ready-to-win effect first half part execution period),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound is output at the same speed in both the first specific section and the second specific section of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, when shifting from the first reach production first half execution period to the first reach production second half execution period, the first reach production second half execution period to the second When shifting to the first half execution period of the ready-to-win performance, when shifting from the first half execution period of the third ready-to-win performance to the second half execution period of the third ready-to-win performance, from the second half execution period of the third ready-to-win performance to the first half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win performance. , the BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the playback speed V4, the same as in other periods)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect moving image of the predetermined effect changes when shifting from the first specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second specific section and when shifting from the second specific section to the second predetermined effect. However, since the output speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change when shifting from the first specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second specific effect, and when shifting from the second specific effect to the second specific effect, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and further, the player can easily recognize the branch of the predetermined effect by changing the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect to the second speed.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3). Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main substrate 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the substrate case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 500Aa and long pieces 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch provided on the power supply substrate 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 7 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 7 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. Thereby, when it is a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability that it is determined to control to a big hit game state is higher than when it is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is determined to be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command specifying the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 079SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 079SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 079SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 079SG. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the sound control board 13 in the feature part 079SG includes a voice synthesizing circuit board 13 for synthesizing sounds (effect sounds) output from the speakers 8L and 8R in cooperation with the effect control CPU 120. An IC079SG132, an amplifier circuit (amplifier) 079SG134 for amplifying the output sound of the sound generated by the voice synthesis CI079SG132, and a voice data ROM 079SG133 are mounted. Sound number data is output to the voice synthesizing IC079SG132 based on the performance control command to cause the voice synthesizing IC079SG132 to generate a sound corresponding to the sound number data.

When sound number data is input from the effect control CPU 120, the voice synthesis IC 079SG 132 generates voices and effect sounds corresponding to the input sound number data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 079SG 134. Output. The amplifier circuit 079SG134 amplifies the voice and sound effects output from the voice synthesizing IC079SG132, and outputs them to the speakers 8L and 8R.

The sound data ROM 079SG133 stores control data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R for outputting sounds corresponding to the effects executed by the effect command corresponding to the sound number data in association with the sound number data. . In other words, these control data are the output mode (frequency characteristics, timing (delay), etc.) of sounds such as sound effects and BGM (music) output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the performance period (for example, the decorative pattern variable display period). is a collection of data including voice data and the like described in chronological order.

FIG. 10-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the feature part 079. FIG. The display area of the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 079SG is formed in a rectangular shape having a height L and a left-right width L when viewed from the front. Most of the display area constitutes a first display area 079SG005F for displaying effects such as a variable display of decoration patterns, a ready-to-win effect, an operation promotion effect and a still image display effect, which will be described later. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 has a first reserved storage display area 079SG005D that can display the number of the first special figure reserved storage by the number of the reserved display of the white circle, and the number of the second special figure reserved storage A second display area 079SG005Sa including a second reserved storage display area 079SG005U that can be displayed according to the number of circular reserved displays and a telop display area 079SG005T that can display a telop indicating a game state is configured.

That is, of the entire display area of the image display device 5, the portion excluding the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is the first display area 079SG005F.

In addition, the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb display information related to the game (holding display, telop display, fourth symbol) at the periphery of the display area of the image display device 5 rather than the first display area 079SG005F. , and the number of reserved memories). That is, the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in the characteristic portion 079SG are also UI (user interface) display areas in the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

And the upper right end of the image display device 5 includes the display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, the number of first special figure pending storage, and the number of second special figure pending storage. 3 display area 079SG005Sb.

Of these, the second display area 079SG005Sa is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its height is less than half the height H of the entire display area of the image display device 5. The horizontal width is formed to have the same length as the horizontal width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5 . The third display area 079SG005Sb is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, but its height and lateral width are formed extremely shorter than the height H and lateral width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. there is

Therefore, in the characteristic portion 079SG, the area of the first display area 079SG005F that occupies the entire display area of the image display device 5 is larger than the total area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. .

As shown in FIG. 10-2(B), in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, the effect control CPU 120 performs a reserved display operation process (see FIG. 8-13) which will be described later. As a result, each hold display can be rotated around the vertical axis at a constant speed (for example, rotation speed V3).

As shown in FIG. 10-2(C), in the telop display area 079SG005T, the effect control CPU 120 performs a telop operation process (see FIG. 10-13) described later, so that the game state and the effect being executed are displayed. A message (for example, if a specific ready-to-win effect is in progress, a message corresponding to the state of the effect, such as "In XX mode!") is moved from left to right at a constant speed (e.g., movement speed V3). It is possible to display one

It should be noted that the characters included in the message corresponding to the game state are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T at the same time when the display reaches the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and is displayed again from the left to the right. is moved in the direction Therefore, when the message corresponding to the game state is displayed while being moved in the telop display area 079SG005T, the entire message corresponding to the game state is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, so that the player can It is easy to recognize the current game state.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the suspension display in the first storage display area 079SG005D and the second storage storage display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are rotated and moved at a common constant speed (V3). Although it is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to rotate and move with

As shown in FIG. 10-2(D), the fourth pattern 079SG005J has an upper pattern 079SG005Ja and a lower pattern 079SG005Jb, and these upper pattern 079SG005Ja and lower pattern 079SG005Jb alternately flash at a constant cycle. , to indicate that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb are both extinguished (turned OFF) at the end timing of the variable display when the variable display result is lost, while the variable display result is a big hit or a loss. In this case, both are turned on (turned ON) at the end timing of the variable display.

It should be noted that the display of the first special figure pending memory number and the display of the second special figure pending memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the timing when a new pending memory is generated and the timing when a new variable display is started. is the only display whose number changes. In other words, the display of the first special figure reserved memory number and the display of the second special figure reserved memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the fourth pattern 079SG005J, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U , Unlike the telop display area 079SG005T, the display mode does not change except for the start timing of the variable display.

Next, the display control section 123 in the characteristic section 079SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5 . The display control unit 123 can cause the image display device 5 to display a predetermined image based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not to be displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. In the case of controlling so as not to display the image based on the data on the performance screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 which created the display data not arranging the image data of the prescribed image, the prescribed image is not displayed on the performance screen. may be controlled as follows.

As shown in FIGS. 10-3(A) to 10-3(D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 3 are arranged. An image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the created display data.

As shown in FIG. 10-3(A), the image data 1 displays the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa. Data drawn to display the pattern 079SG005J in the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is also data drawn to display the small pattern of the image data 1 decoration pattern in the first display area 079SG005F (left side of the third display area 079SG005Sb).

As shown in FIG. 10-3(B), the image data 2 is data drawn to display images of a chance-up effect, a still image display effect, and an operation promotion effect, which will be described later, in the first display area 079SG005F. .

As shown in FIG. 10-3(C), the image data 3 is data drawn to display the variable display of decorative patterns and the ready-to-win effect in the first display area 079SG005F.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-3(A) to 10-3(C), the image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3 have display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5. is set. The highest display priority is set for image data 1, and the lowest is set for image data 3 (image display priority in image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3). . That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as the lower image than the image based on the image data 1, and the image based on the image data 3 is displayed. The image is displayed as an image in a lower layer (bottom layer) than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2 . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-3(D), in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 3, and the image based on the image data 1 is displayed. The image based on the image data 2 and the image based on the image data 3 are preferentially displayed.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. is displayed as the lowest hierarchical image, the image based on the image data 3 may be at least partly invisible or invisible due to the image based on the first data or the image based on the image data 2. There is

In this characteristic portion 079SG, although the details will be described later, the images based on the image data 1 and the image data 2 are displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images whose progress speed is always constant, while the image data 3 Based on the data stored in the CGROM in advance, the images are displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images and still images of a plurality of advancing speeds.

In particular, in this feature part 079SG, although the details will be described later, the display of the animation of the reach effect during the reach effect of the super reach can be executed at the normal progress speed V1 and the progress speed V2 (slow motion) slower than V1. It has become. This is because the data for the moving image to be displayed at the advancing speed V1 and the data for the moving image to be displayed at the advancing speed V2 are stored in advance in the CGROM, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, only the data for the effect animation to be displayed at the progress speed V1 is stored in advance in the CGROM, and by performing predetermined processing on the data, part of the effect animation for the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may be possible to display

In this manner, in the present characteristic section 079SG, by setting the video progress speed, which is the speed at which the effect moving image changes, to V1, the progress speed of the ready-to-win effect recognized by the player becomes the first speed, and during the non-slow motion period, the video By setting the progressing speed to V2, which is slower than V1, the slow motion period is set in which the progressing speed of the ready-to-win effect recognized by the player is the second slow speed. In other words, the slow-motion moving image, which is an effect moving image with a slow progression speed of the effect in the feature part 079SG, is displayed before the slow-motion moving image, and the image progresses faster than the non-slow-motion moving image whose image progress speed is V1. Anything with a slow speed is fine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the form in which a slow motion period is provided in all super reach effects is exemplified (see FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for example, as a super reach effect, the contents of the effect animation itself displayed on the image display device 5 are the same as the contents of the super reach effect shown in FIGS. does not change from V1 to V2, that is, by executing a super reach effect that does not become a slow motion period, in the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, the slow motion period may be made easier for the player to recognize.

In other words, in the case of executing the super ready-to-win effect in which the content of the effect moving image is the same but the video progress speed does not change to V2, the effect moving image is set to the second speed slower than the first speed in the present invention. means that the effect moving image of the same content is displayed at a video progressing speed V2 that is slower than the video progressing speed V1 in the non-slow motion super reach effect, so that the duration is longer than that of the non-slow motion super reach effect. The effect moving image to be displayed corresponds.

In addition, as described above, in this feature part 079SG, by slowing down the image progress speed of the effect moving image, a slow motion effect is configured in which the progress speed of the ready-to-win effect that the player feels is slow, and the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R , does not change from the playback speed V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. By accelerating the reproduction speed of the sound output from the game effect lamp 9 and the light emission period of the game effect lamp 9, a pseudo-slow motion may be constructed in which the player feels that the progress speed of the ready-to-win performance has slowed down.

That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 079SG is provided with a plurality of effect output means including display means capable of displaying effect moving images, and among these effect output means, at least one effect output means advances the effect is different between the slow-motion period and the non-slow-motion period so that the player can recognize that the effect being executed is the slow-motion during the slow-motion period.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 079SG, the display of the effect moving image of the reach effect is always displayed at the progress speed V2 during the slow motion period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the slow motion The period may change the progress speed of the display of the effect animation of the ready-to-win effect (for example, the progress speed gradually decreases with the passage of time, or the progress speed increases and decreases within a predetermined range).

FIG. 10-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this characteristic portion 079SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "loss" or "big hit" or "minor hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (for example, "1" to "10"). .

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 10-4(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count of a passage notification command, probability variation control, and time saving control to be performed.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in this characteristic portion 079SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big hit" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". It is a random value used to determine the , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 10-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In this feature part 079SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 079SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 079SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 079SG), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 079SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to when it is a normal state or a time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of winning is increased.

In addition, FIG. 10-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for special symbol display result determination whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win". is a table referenced for

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this characteristic portion 079SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the characteristic part 079SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the first special figure game and the second special figure. there is Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 10-7(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in this feature part 079SG is based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the jackpot game state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 Special symbol game by special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for judging the jackpot type is “non-probability variable jackpot”, “probability variable jackpot A”, “ It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, when explaining the jackpot type in this feature part 079SG with reference to FIG. ``Probability variable jackpot A'', ``probability variable jackpot B'', and ``probability variable jackpot C'' which are executed and shifted to a high probability high base state, and only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state is completed to a low probability high base state. The "non-probable variable jackpot" to be shifted is set.

The big win game state by the "probability variable big win A" is a big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. The big win game state by the "probability variable big win B" is a big win in which 5 rounds (so-called 5 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. The big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a big win in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. In addition, the big win game state by the "non-probability variable big win" is a big win in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. In some cases, the “non-probability variable jackpot” is referred to as a 2-round (2R) non-probability variable jackpot.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in this characteristic portion 079SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is the same as the probability variable big win C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this characteristic part 079SG). In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

High-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win A, the variable probability big win B, and the variable probability big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. . Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the variable probability big win A or the variable probability big win B, the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state by the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 079SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "variable probability big hit A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not decided to control the big hit type as "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C" to a big hit state with a small number of rounds. In a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by the high opening control, the frequent occurrence of a big win state with few winning balls is avoided and the interest in the game is reduced. It is designed to prevent this from happening.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" and "variable probability big hit C" depends on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure. Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 10-8 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 079SG. In this characteristic portion 079SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. It should be noted that although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in this characteristic portion 079SG, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. may be provided. Moreover, even in the super reach variation pattern, a plurality of super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . may be provided.

It should be noted that the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 079SG also includes a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "minor winning".

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 079SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in the present characteristic unit 079SG, as described later, the types of the variation patterns are determined first, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, and the like. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 079SG. In this characteristic part 079SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is changed according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach α3 jackpot) and PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 jackpot) and PB1-5 (super reach β3 big hit variation pattern). Also, if the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to set the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) variation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot variation pattern).

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the big-hit variation pattern determination table A and the big-hit variation pattern determination table have different allocation numbers of determination values for PB1-2 to PB1-5. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 45 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 150 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 500 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. In the big hit variation pattern determination table B, 30 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 135 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 315 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 515 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. That is, in the present characteristic portion 079SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot, the super reach β type variation patterns PB1-3 and PB1-4 are at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. , it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

Also, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to determine the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern). do.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 loss) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β3).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 deviation) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β3).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, select the variation pattern determination table C for loss, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 deviation) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β3).

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 loss), PA2-3 (variation pattern of super reach α3 loss) and PA2 -4 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β2) and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β3).

In other words, if the variable display result in the present characteristic unit 079SG is "missing", the number of pending storage of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the fact that it is in a time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is performed more frequently due to the shortening fluctuation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). , it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being slowed down.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 10-8, the ready-to-reach effect of super reach α1 (the ready-to-reach effect executed in the variable display of the variation pattern PB1-2) is variable after the first half of the first ready-to-reach effect described later is executed. This is a ready-to-win effect in which the display result is a big hit, and the ready-to-win effect of super reach α2 (ready-to-win effect executed by variable display of the fluctuation pattern PA2-2) is executed in the first half and the latter half of the first ready-to-win effect described later. This is a ready-to-reach effect in which the variable display result is lost after the change, and the ready-to-reach effect of super reach α3 (ready-to-reach effect executed by variable display in the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 or PB1-3) is the first reach to be described later. This is a ready-to-win effect in which a second ready-to-win effect, which will be described later, is further executed after the first half and the latter half of the effect are executed, and the variable display result is a big hit or a loss.

And, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, as shown in FIGS. 10-8 and 10-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the longer the variable display It is set so that the ratio of the result to be a big hit (big hit expectation) is high. In other words, for the variable display of these variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit after being executed up to the second ready-to-win effect is the first ready-to-win effect to be executed. It is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit.

In addition, the reach effect of super reach β1 (reach effect executed by variable display of fluctuation patterns PB1-4) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a big hit after the first half of the third reach effect described later is executed. Yes, the reach effect of super reach β2 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the fluctuation pattern PA2-4) is changed after the first half and the second half of the third reach effect described later are executed. It is a ready-to-reach production, and the ready-to-reach production of super reach β3 (ready-to-reach production executed with variable display in the fluctuation pattern PA2-5 or PB1-5) executes the first half and the second half of the third ready-to-reach production described later. After that, a fourth ready-to-win effect, which will be described later, is further executed, and the result of the variable display is a big win or a losing effect.

And, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, as shown in FIGS. 10-8 and 10-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the longer the variable display It is set so that the ratio of the result to be a big hit (big hit expectation) is high. In other words, for the variable display of these variation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit after being executed up to the fourth ready-to-win effect is the third ready-to-win effect. It is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, the second ready-to-win effect is always executed after the first ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect is always executed after the third ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is limited to this. The second ready-to-win effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect may be executed alone.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, each ready-to-win effect can be executed by combining the first ready-to-win effect and the second ready-to-win effect during the variable display, and by combining the third ready-to-reach effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect. Although the possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ready-to-reach production is a combination other than these combinations (for example, the first ready-to-reach production and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production and the third You may provide a case where it is executed in a combination of ready-to-win effects, etc.).

In addition, in this feature part 069SG, as shown in FIG. The ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (jackpot expectation) is set higher than the fluctuation patterns (variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), but the present invention is based on this Not limited, part of the super reach β system variation pattern (variation pattern PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) is super reach α system variation pattern (variation pattern PA2- 2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) may be lower than any of the big hit expectations.

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 079SG, there is a game control data holding area 079SG 150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 079SG150 shown in FIG. 10-10 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 079SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 079SG152. , a game control timer setting unit 079SG153, a game control counter setting unit 079SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 079SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A is a special feature that has not yet been started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 079SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 079SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, the starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern pending storage unit 079SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 079SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 079SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 079SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 079SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 079SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 079SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. Area 079SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 079SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11(A) includes a effect control flag setting portion 079SG191, a effect control timer setting portion 079SG192, a effect control counter setting portion 079SG193, and a effect control buffer setting portion 079SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 079SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 079SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing section 079SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 079SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, the start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command) and the pending memory number notification command (second 1 pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A are associated with these starting entrance winning designation commands and reservation storage number notification commands. , A storage area (entry) for storing separately in the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage is secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening. Then, when starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , the pending storage number notification command.

The commands stored in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A shown in FIG. 10-11(B) are the entries (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start prize determination process of the characterizing portion 079SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 079SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 079SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 079SG154, it should be able to specify the number of 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 079SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 079SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "1" ( step 079 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 079SGS101 (step 079SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit at step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( step 079 SGS 104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 079SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At step 079SGS105, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (step 079SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "2" ( step 079 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 079SGS103 and step 079SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer is updated so as to add 1 (step 079SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 079SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of step 079SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step 079SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 079SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A, while the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the processing of step 079SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 079SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 079SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 for sending the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this manner is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 079 SGS111, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, storage storage for the effect control board 12 Settings for sending the number notification command are made (step 079 SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command set in this manner is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 079SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS115). move on. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step 079SGS114; N), after clearing the start buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (step 079SGS116), End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 10-13 is part of a flow chart showing the effect control process processing in this characterizing section 079SG. In the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prefetching notice setting process (step S161), and then updates the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SHSG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and these first Suspended display operation processing (step 079SG162) for operating (rotated display) the suspended displays displayed in the suspended storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second suspended storage display area 079SG005U, and the operation display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T. After executing the telop operation processing (step 079SGS163) and the fourth design display processing (step 079SG164) for executing the variable display of the fourth design 079SG005J, one of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect control process flag process.

10-14 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is ON (step 079SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 079SGS271; Y), to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 079 SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

Also, if the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off at step 079SGS271 (step 079SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is off (step 079SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer 079SG194A at the time of start winning, 1 buffer number each Shift up (step 079 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing step 079SGS272 or step 079SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 079SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decoration design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (step 079SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 079SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable big hit B or the probability variable big hit C, the stop symbol other than "7" It is determined from a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is determined from "334", "778", etc., which are chances. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (step 079SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; N), proceed to step 079SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; Y). executes a chance-up effect determination process (step 079SGS278), and determines whether or not to execute a chance-up effect in the second half of the first ready-to-win effect or the second half of the third ready-to-win effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-15, when the variable display result is a failure, the chance-up effect is decided to be executed at a rate of 20%, and the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 80%. decide. Further, when the variable display result is a big hit, execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 80%, and non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 20%. That is, in the variable display of the reach of the characteristic portion 079SG, when the chance-up effect is executed, the expectation of big hit is set higher than when the chance-up effect is not executed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 and 10-32, in the present characteristic portion 079SG, only one production pattern is provided as the production mode of the chance-up production, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a plurality of performance patterns may be provided as a performance mode of the chance-up performance, and the degree of expectation for a big win may differ depending on which performance pattern the chance-up performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this characteristic part 079SG, as shown in FIGS. A plurality of performance start timings for performance may be provided, and the degree of expectation for a big win may differ depending on which performance start timing the chance-up performance is started.

Further, after determining execution/non-execution of the chance-up effect in step 079SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3). (Step 079SGS279). If the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079 SGS279; Y), the notification effect (big hit notification effect or loss A still image display effect for determining the effect pattern of the still image display effect for displaying the still image displayed at the end of the second ready-to-win effect on the image display device 5 during the period until the notification effect is started. A determination process (step 079SGS280) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283.

In the still image display effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 10-16A, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the still image display effect at a rate of 100% when the variable display result is a failure. If the pattern SG-1 is determined and the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the still image display effect is determined to be the pattern SG-1 at a rate of 80% and the pattern SG-2 at a rate of 20%. do.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-16(B), the pattern SG-1 of the still image display effect is to freeze the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second ready-to-win effect. In the pattern SG-2 of the still image display effect, the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 is displayed as a still image at the end of the second reach effect. , is an effect pattern for changing the color of the still image.

In particular, the pattern SG-2 is an effect pattern that is executed only when the variable display result is a big hit. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not (whether or not the color of the still image changes).

In addition, if it is not the variation pattern of super reach α3 in step 079SGS281 (step 079SGS281; N), it is further determined whether the variation pattern of the variable display is super reach β3 (PA2-5 or PB1-5) ( step S079SGS282). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern other than super reach β3 (step 079SGS282; N), proceed to step 079SGS283. ), an operation promotion effect determination process (step 079SGS282) for determining the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect prompting the player to operate the push button 31B during execution of the fourth ready-to-win effect, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283. .

In the operation promotion effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 10-17(A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect to the pattern SS at a rate of 80% when the variable display result is a failure. -1 is determined, and pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect at a rate of 20%, and the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 80%.

As shown in FIG. 10-17(B), the pattern SS-1 of the operation prompting effect is a pattern of displaying the image of the push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. The effect pattern SS-2 is a effect pattern in which the image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 in a size larger than that of the pattern SS-1.

In other words, as the operation promotion effect in the present characteristic portion 079SG, when the image of the push button 31B of a large size is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2). ), the ratio is higher than when the image of the normal size push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-1). Since there is a high probability that the variable display result is a big win (a big win notification performance is executed), the player is made to pay attention to the size of the image of the push button 31B displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation promotion performance is executed. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

At step 079 SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute each effect such as the chance-up effect, still image display effect, operation promotion effect, etc., and the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the effect pattern and variation pattern designation command. select. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 079SGS284).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 079SGS285). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . In addition, it outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 079SGS286). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 079SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 079SGS288).

In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts (-1) the value of the process timer each time the variable display effect processing is executed, and the process timer after the subtraction times out. determine whether or not Then, when the process timer after subtraction has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and when the process timer after subtraction has timed out, the process data is processed. As soon as the switching is performed, the next process timer is started, and the production device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data.

10-18 to 10-35, description will be given of the effect modes of variable display of super reach α1 to α3 and super reach β1 to β3 in the characteristic portion 079SG.

First, regarding the variable display of super reach α1 to α3 shown in FIGS. In the first display area 079SG005F of the device 5, the effect animation such as the variable display of the decoration pattern is started at the normal progress speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from left to right (moving image progress speed in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progress speed of V3. At the same time, from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM and effect sounds corresponding to the variable display are started at the normal reproduction speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005jb in the fourth pattern 079SG005J start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts to blink at a constant cycle. be. Hereinafter, the flashing or lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in the characteristic portion 079SG means that the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are all synchronized and flashed or lit. The invention is not limited to this, and the blinking and lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-18, 10-19, and 10-26(A) to 10-26(C), when the ready-to-win effect develops due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the first ready-to-win effect is reached. The execution period starts, and the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A is started. When the second half of the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-win effect is reached due to the progress of the battle effect, the display of the moving image of the friendly character A attacking the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the display of the moving image is started, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the appearance of the friendly character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

During the period when friendly character A attacking enemy character A is displayed in slow motion as described above (during the period in which the progress speed of the animation of the battle effect in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the variable display is the variable display of super reach α1, when the first half of the first reach effect execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a big win notification effect, after displaying a moving image in which the ally character A succeeds in attacking and the enemy character A falls down, the decorative symbols are stopped in a combination of the big wins to control the big win game state. to be notified. In particular, when the big hit notification effect is started, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. With 079SG005Sa, an image of a big hit notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-26(H), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big win, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

It should be noted that during the jackpot notification effect, the display of the moving image of the part where the attack of the ally character A succeeds is executed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-26 (E)), and then the enemy character The display of the moving image of the falling portion is executed at the advancing speed V2 which is lower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-26 (F)). Then, the moving image of the portion in which it is announced that the decorative symbols are stopped in a winning combination and controlled to the winning game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (FIG. 10-26 (G)). applicable).

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

On the other hand, when the variable display is super reach α2 or super reach α3 variable display, when the execution period of the first half of the first reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-26 (D) , the attack of the ally character A is not successful, and the second half of the first ready-to-win effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-19 and FIGS. 10-27(A) to 10-27(B), when the transition is made to the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the battle effect between friendly character A and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the BGM, production sound, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, during the execution period of the second half of the first ready-to-win effect, when the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, as shown in FIG. . The chance-up effect is executed at the progressing speed V1 in the same manner as the effect animation of the battle effect.

When the second half of the execution period of the second half of the first ready-to-reach effect progresses due to the progress of the battle effect, the display of the moving image of the friend character A attacking the enemy character A starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the display of the moving image is started, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2 which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the image of the friend character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

During the period when friendly character A attacking enemy character A is displayed in slow motion as described above (during the period in which the progress speed of the animation of the battle effect in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of super reach α2, when the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. Secondly, in the first display area 079SG005F, after the friendly character A's attack fails and is knocked down by the enemy character A, the variable display result is stopped with a combination of the decorative symbols that are lost. is reported.

It should be noted that during the failure notification effect, the display of the moving image is executed at V1, which is the normal progress speed, between the part where the friendly character A's attack fails and the part where the variable display result is notified of the failure. be.

In addition, during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-27(H), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, a stop display with a combination of the decorative pattern and the small pattern during the design confirmation period, and a non-display of the fourth pattern (both the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb are extinguished). ) is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the super reach α3 variable display, as shown in FIGS. The attack of the character A succeeds and defeats the enemy character A. Then, it shifts to the execution period of the first half of the second ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28(A) to 10-28(B), when the second reach effect first half execution period starts, ally character A and enemy character B The battle production of progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and BGM, production sounds, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

As the battle effect progresses, when the second half of the second ready-to-reach effect first half execution period is reached, as shown in FIGS. In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, display of concentration lines is started, and in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, display of a moving image in which the friend character A attacks the enemy character B is started. When the moving image starts to be displayed, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the ally character A attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion as described above (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle effect animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is faster). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-28(D), the number of concentrated lines as the above-described effect rendering is gradually increased.

That is, in the second half of the ready-to-win production second half execution period, the progress speed of the battle production moving image is lowered to V2, and the number of concentration lines displayed in the first display area 079SG005F increases, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes violently. Therefore, the increase in the number of concentration lines and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 can effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result of the battle effect (whether the big win notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed). It is possible.

Then, after the second reach effect latter half execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. The image that was being played (in this characteristic portion 079SG, the image immediately before the attack of the friend character A hits the enemy character B) is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F.

During the execution period of the still image display effect, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is switched from V1 to 0, but the rotation of the pending display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the telop from left to right The movement in the direction is executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and the BGM, effect sound, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without change. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is the progress of the animation of the battle production. Return to the period before the speed drops to V2.

Incidentally, when the pattern SG-2 is determined as the effect pattern of the still image display effect, as shown in FIGS. The colors of the last displayed image are reversed. After the end of the still image display effect in which the color is reversed, as a big win notification effect, the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B, and after the enemy character B falls down, the game state is controlled to the big win game state. be notified. In particular, when the combination of decorative patterns indicating a big win is stopped as the big win notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is made. An image of a big hit notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-29(F), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

As a jackpot notification effect when the static image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, as shown in FIG. However, the moving image in which the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, after the enemy character B falls down, the moving image in which the decoration patterns stop with the combination of the big win is displayed at the advancing speed V1. In particular, when the combination of decorative patterns indicating a big win is stopped as the big win notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is made. An image of a big hit notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

On the other hand, when the pattern SG-1 is determined as the still image display effect, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle effect is not reversed as the still image display effect, and the image shown in FIG. 10-30 (A ) ~ as shown in Figure 10-30 (D), the case where the jackpot notification effect is executed as described above, and as shown in Figure 10-30 (F) ~ Figure 10-30 (H), loss notification In some cases, production is executed.

The jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1 is the same as the big hit notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, as shown in FIG. 10-20. In addition, the moving image in which the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B is displayed at the advancing speed V1, but the moving image in which the enemy character B falls down is displayed at the advancing speed V2. After the enemy character B has fallen down, it is displayed at the advancing speed V1. It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30(E), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

In addition, as a failure notification effect when the static image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1, the attack of friendly character A does not hit enemy character B, and conversely, the attack of enemy character B hits friendly character A. After the ally character A hits and falls down, the decorative symbols stop due to a combination of missing symbols, and it is notified that the big win game state is not controlled.

10-21, as the failure notification effect, a moving image is displayed at the advancing speed V1 until the enemy character B is knocked down by the enemy character B without being hit by the attack of the friend character A. FIG. It should be noted that during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the suspension display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30(I), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, a stop display with a combination of the decorative pattern and the small pattern during the design confirmation period, and a non-display of the fourth pattern (both the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb are extinguished). ) is performed.

10-22, 10-23, and 10-31(A) to 10-31(H), when the variable display is started, the image In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, the effect moving image such as the variable display of the decoration pattern is started at the normal progressing speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right (moving image progress speed in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progress speed of V3. At the same time, from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM and effect sounds corresponding to the variable display are started at the normal reproduction speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005jb in the fourth pattern 079SG005J start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts to blink at a constant cycle. be.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-22, 10-23, and 10-31(A) to 10-31(C), when it is time to develop the ready-to-win effect due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the third ready-to-reach effect is reached. The execution period starts, and the battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character A is started. When the second half of the execution period of the first half of the third ready-to-win effect progresses as the battle effect progresses, display of a moving image in which the friend character B attacks the enemy character A starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the moving image starts to be displayed, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the appearance of the friend character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle effect animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is super reach β1 variable display, when the execution period of the first half of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 10-22 and FIGS. Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a big win notification effect, after a moving image of a successful attack by the ally character B and the enemy character A falling down is displayed, it is reported that the game will be controlled to the big win game state. In particular, when the big hit notification effect is started, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. With 079SG005Sa, an image of a big hit notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-31(H), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the display of the moving image of the part where the attack of the friend character B succeeds is executed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-30 (E)), and the enemy character after that The display of the moving image of the falling portion is executed at the advancing speed V2 which is lower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-30 (F)). Then, the moving image of the portion in which it is announced that the decorative symbols are stopped in a combination of the big wins and is controlled to the big win game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (Fig. 10-30 (G) applicable).

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

On the other hand, when the variable display is super reach β2 or super reach β3 variable display, when the third reach effect first half execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. 10-23 and 10-31 (D) , the attack of the ally character B is not successful, and the second half of the third ready-to-win effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-23 and FIGS. 10-32(A) to 10-32(B), when the second half of the third reach effect is executed, the battle effect between friendly character B and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the BGM, production sound, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, during the execution period of the second half of the third reach effect, when the effect moving image of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, as shown in FIG. 10-32(B), the chance-up effect may be executed. . The chance-up effect is executed at the progressing speed V1 in the same manner as the effect animation of the battle effect.

In particular, in the image display device 5, while the small patterns are displayed with priority over the chance-up production effect animation, the chance-up production production animation is displayed in the decorative pattern (the image shown in FIG. 10-32 (B) It is displayed with priority over "7" displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display device 5). Therefore, in this characteristic part 079SG, during the execution period of the chance-up effect, the player can recognize that the variable display is being performed by visually recognizing the small symbols, and the effect animation of the chance-up effect is displayed. By giving priority to display over the pattern, it is possible to reliably secure an area for displaying the effect moving image of the chang-up effect on the image display device 5. - 特許庁

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, the animation of the chance-up production is displayed with priority over the decoration pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decoration pattern is displayed rather than the production animation of the chance-up production. may also be displayed with priority. By doing so, the player can easily recognize which combination of decorative symbols the ready-to-win effect in execution has developed from, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

When the second half of the execution period of the second half of the first ready-to-win effect is approached as the battle effect progresses, display of a moving image of the friend character B attacking the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the display of the moving image is started, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2 which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the appearance of the friend character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the ally character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion as described above (during the period in which the progress speed of the animation of the battle presentation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the variable display is super reach β2 variable display, when the execution period of the second half of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 10-23 and FIGS. Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, after the ally character B's attack fails and is defeated by the enemy character A, it is reported that the variable display result is a miss as a miss notification effect.

It should be noted that during the failure notification effect, the display of the moving image is executed at V1, which is the normal progress speed, between the part where the friendly character B's attack fails and the part where the variable display result is notified of the failure. be.

Further, during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-32(H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, the combination of the decoration pattern and the small pattern is stopped during the design confirmation period, and the fourth pattern is turned off. ) is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the super reach β3 variable display, as shown in FIGS. The attack of the character B succeeds and defeats the enemy character A. Then, it shifts to the first half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIGS. 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33(A) to 10-33(B), when the transition is made to the first half execution period of the fourth reach effect, the friend character AB and the enemy character B Battle production progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the BGM, production sound, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the second half of the first half execution period of the fourth reach effect progresses due to the progress of the battle effect, as shown in FIGS. Display of a moving image of friendly character B attacking enemy character B is started in the first display area 079SG005F. When the display of the moving image is started, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2 which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the image of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character B attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the animation of the battle effect in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is faster).

That is, in the second half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the progress speed of the animation of the battle effect decreases to V2, and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 becomes more intense. It is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result (whether the big hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed).

Then, when the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect progresses, the operation promoting effect is executed. When pattern SS-1 is determined as the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, the push button 31B is displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 along with the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the shape of the push button 31B. display of the meter 079SG005M and the effect image 079SG005E suggesting the operation acceptance period of , and the update display of the meter 079SG005M and the enlarged update display of the effect image 079SG005E toward the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 are started. In addition, as described above, since the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 10-3), the constant It is displayed as a movie of the progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 10-33(D), during the execution period of the operation prompting effect, the player can be notified of the operation reception period of the push button 31B by updating display of the meter 079SG005M, while enlarging the effect image 079SG005E. Update display progresses. Since the effect image 079SG005E has a predetermined transmittance (for example, 10% to 50%), the player can see the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E. The visibility of the battle production is lower than that. Since the execution period of the operation-promoting output is included in the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation-promoting effect.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 (D) and 10-33 (E), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2, but the end timing of the operation promotion effect (push At the point of time when the button 31B operation reception end timing), the progress does not proceed to the scene where it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B will hit the enemy character B, that is, the big hit notification effect or the losing notification effect is not started. It has become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-34(A) to 10-34(E), when pattern SS-2 is determined as the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, the first display of the image display device 5 is displayed. In the center of the region 079SG005F, display of an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb larger in size than the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba as an operation prompting image imitating the shape of the push button 31B and a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B start. and the update display of the meter 079SG005M is started. Incidentally, as described above, since the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 10-3), the constant It is displayed as a movie of the progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 10-34(D), during the execution period of the operation prompting effect, the player can be notified of the operation reception period of the push button 31B by updating display of the meter 079SG005M, while the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb Most of the images in the battle production are hidden. As described above, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is an image having a size larger than that of the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and having a transmittance of 0%. Therefore, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than in the case where the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the execution period of the operation-promoting output is included in the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation-promoting effect.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-34 (D) and 10-34 (E), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2, but the end timing of the operation promotion effect (push At the point of time when the operation reception end timing of the button 31B), the scene does not proceed until it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B will hit the enemy character B, that is, the big hit notification effect or the losing notification effect is not started. It has become.

Then, when the player operates the push button 31B during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, or when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B (the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is When finished), the big hit notification effect or loss notification effect is executed from the timing when the player operates the push button 31B or the timing when the operation promotion effect ends.

10-24 and FIGS. 10-35(A) to 10-35(C), as the big hit notification effect after the operation promotion effect, there is a moving image in which the attack of the friend character B hits the enemy character B. Although the moving image is displayed at the advancing speed V1, the moving image in which the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, the moving image after the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V1. It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-35(D), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

10-25 and FIGS. 10-35(E) to 10-35(G). On the contrary, after the attack of the enemy character B hits the ally character B and the ally character B falls down, it is informed that the big winning game state is not controlled. In particular, when the failure notification effect is executed, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. With 079SG005Sa, an image of a big hit notification effect is displayed.

10-25, as the failure notification effect, a moving image is displayed at the progressing speed V1 until the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped without the attack of the ally character B being hit. It should be noted that during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the suspension display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-35(H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, a stop display with a combination of the decorative pattern and the small pattern during the design confirmation period, and a non-display of the fourth pattern (both the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb are extinguished). ) is performed.

10-26 (H), 10-27 (H), 10-29 (F), 10-30 (E), 10-30 (I), 10-31 (H), As shown in FIGS. 10-32(H), 10-35(D), and 10-35(H), in this characteristic portion 079SG, at the end timing of the variable display, a telop (message) is displayed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the telop display area 079SG005T itself is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end timing of the variable display. is performed, the display of the telop (message) itself in the telop display area 079SG005T may not be performed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, in the variable display of super reach α3 and super reach β3, the game effect lamp 9 However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened during the slow motion period other than immediately before the notification effect. Also, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened during a part of the period (non-slow motion period) during which the display of the effect moving image of the ready-to-win effect is executed at the progress speed V1.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. During the execution period of the first half part, the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1, and the second half of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect. During the partial execution period, the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2. Therefore, while the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progressing speed V2, the degree of empathy of the player for the teammate character displayed during the ready-to-win effect is enhanced, and a big win is announced. Since it is possible to heighten the sense of expectation for the execution of the performance, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. On the other hand, during the execution period of the first half of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, and during the execution period of the latter half of each, the BGM, effect sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R are played. Since the output is unchanged at V4, which is the normal reproduction speed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, since the sound output hand in this characteristic part 079SG includes the voice synthesizing IC 079SG132, the amplifier circuit 079SG134, and the speakers 8L and 8R, reproducibility is ensured during variable display including when the ready-to-win effect is executed and when the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to output high-quality background music (music), effect sounds, and other effects sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R at an appropriate volume, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and 10-25, during the execution period of the second reach production second half and during the execution period of the fourth reach production latter half, the game effect Since the lamp 9 blinks at a period shorter than usual, the effect can be improved by blinking the game effect lamp 9 at a short period in the period when the progress speed of the effect moving image is V2.

In addition, in this characterizing part 079SG, a form in which the flashing period of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second half of the reach effect or during the period of the second half of the fourth reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be gradually shortened according to the progress of the second ready-to-win effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect. By doing so, the player can recognize from the blinking period of the game effect lamp 9 that the notification effect will be executed soon, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characterizing portion 079SG, an example is given in which the blinking period of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second half of the reach effect or during the period of the second half of the fourth reach effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed at any timing of the first ready-to-win effect to the fourth ready-to-win effect.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during the execution period of each of the first ready-to-reach effect, the second ready-to-reach effect, the third ready-to-reach effect, and the fourth ready-to-reach effect, the effect animation of the ready-to-reach effect progresses. While the speed changes between V1 and V2, both the rotation speed of the pending display and the movement speed of the telop are constant at V3, and the reproduction speed of the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is constant at V4. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, an example is given in which both the rotation speed of the suspension display displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement display speed of the telop are set to V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the rotation speed of the pending display and the moving display speed of the telop may be different speeds as long as they are constant regardless of the progress of each ready-to-win effect.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-2(A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the area of the third display area 079SG005Sb combined. During execution, the player can more easily recognize the ready-to-win effect displayed in the first display area 079SG005F than the hold display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, thereby improving the game interest.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, in the period other than during the reach effect, the rotation display of the suspension display is rotated at the rotation speed V3 in the first suspension memory display area 079SG005D and the second suspension memory display area 079SG005U. In the telop display area 079SG005T, the moving display of the telop is performed at the moving speed V3. It is possible to prevent these pending displays and telops from becoming difficult to recognize.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-2(C), the characters included in the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T, and at the same time when the display ends, the characters appear in the telop display area 079SG005T. Since it is displayed again at the left end of 079SG005T and moved again from left to right, the entire telop (message) is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T. Therefore, the player can always recognize the entire moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, the form in which the entire telop is always displayed moving in the telop display area 079SG005T is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop is moved in the telop display area 079SG005T. A portion of the displayed telop may be invisible to the player at some point.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28, in the second half of the reach effect execution period, the display of the effect moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 and the image By executing the effect presentation of displaying the concentration line on the display device 5, the effect presentation can enhance the presentation effect in the latter half execution period of the second ready-to-win presentation, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. In particular, in this characteristic part 079SG, as shown in FIGS. The increase in the number makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second ready-to-win performance ends and the big hit notification performance or the loss notification performance is executed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, an example of a form in which the effect production in the present invention is displayed with a concentrated line is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of the movable body 32 within a predetermined range, the speaker 8L, The output of a specific sound effect from 8R, the vibration of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the vibration of the image display device 5 itself, etc. are executed as effect effects, and the second reach effect ( As the battle production progresses, the degree of effect of the effect production is gradually increased (for example, the range of movement of the movable body 32 is widened, the volume of the specific sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased, the stick Alternatively, the vibration of the controller 31A or the push button 31B may be increased, or the vibration of the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the image display device 5 itself may be increased.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-26 (G), 10-29 (E), 10-30 (D), 10-31 (G), and 10-35 (C), as a jackpot notification effect When the decoration pattern stops with a combination of a big hit, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F is displayed. Since the image of the big win notification effect is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the visibility of the big win notification effect in the second display area 079SG005Sa is further enhanced, and the player is made to recognize that it is controlled to the big win game state. It can be done easily.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when the big hit notification effect is executed, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden. Although the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second display area 079SG005Sa In a state where the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed, the image of the big hit notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa (the second In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the image of the big hit notification effect may be displayed overlapping the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T.

At this time, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed transparently or reduced, or the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U are displayed. The visibility of the big hit notification image may be improved by hiding only one of the reserved displays displayed in the reserved display area.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-29, in the second reach effect latter half execution period, the still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F, while FIGS. As shown in 10-21, during the execution period of the still image display effect, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotating display of the suspended display in the first suspended storage display area 079SG005D and the second suspended storage display area 079SG005U, and the Since the movement display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in (C) continues without stopping, it is possible that the suspension display is being displayed or the telop movement is being displayed during the execution period of the still image display effect. can be easily recognized by the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the display of the pending display and the display of the telop due to the stoppage of the rotating display of the pending display and the moving display of the telop. .

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-16 and 10-29 (A) to 10-29 (B), when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, the color of the still image is inverted. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the still image display effect is being executed by reversing the color of the still image.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, as a form of changing the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as the still image display effect, the form of reversing the color of the still image is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not limited to this, but the forms of changing the color of the still image include changing the color of the still image to black and white, changing only part of the color of the still image, and adding new colors to the still image. It may be added.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-29(B), when the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed by executing the still image display effect in pattern SG-2, Since the color of the pending display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the color of the fourth symbol displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not reversed, the player can easily see the colors displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa. By comparing the pending display, telop, fourth pattern, etc. with the still image, it is possible to easily recognize that the color of the still image has changed.

Also, in each variable display of super reach in this characteristic part 079SG, a pattern of shifting to a second reach effect and a fourth reach effect after execution of a first reach effect and a third reach effect, and a pattern of shifting to a first reach effect and a third reach effect Since there is a pattern in which the variable display is terminated by shifting to the second ready-to-win effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect after the performance is executed, the display of the ready-to-win effect animation progresses during the first ready-to-reach effect and the third ready-to-win effect. Whether or not to shift to the second ready-to-win effect or the fourth ready-to-win effect after being executed at the speed V2, and display of the effect animation of the ready-to-reach effect during the second ready-to-reach effect or the third ready-to-win effect are executed at the progress speed V2. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not it is reported that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state after the game is played, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-19, 10-20, 10-21, 10-23, 10-24, and 10-25, during the first reach production and the third reach production, the second During the execution period of the second half of the first reach production and the second half of the execution period of the second half of the third reach production, the production in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character and the second half execution period of the first reach production or the latter half of the third reach production are carried out at the same time. Since it is executed at the speed V1, the progress speed when shifting from the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-win performance to the second half of the first half of the ready-to-win performance or from the first half of the execution period of the third ready-to-win performance to the second half of the third ready-to-win performance. is different from the progress speed of the performance in which the friend character is defeated by the enemy character in the second half execution period of the first reach performance and the second half execution period of the third reach performance. You can prevent it from getting lost. 10-18, 10-20, 10-22, 10-24, 10-25 and 10-26 (E) to 10-26 (G), 10-29 (C) ~ Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 (B) ~ Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (E) ~ Figure 10-31 (G), Figure 10-35 (A) ~ Figure As shown in 10-35(C), in the big hit notification effect of this characteristic part 079SG, while the animation when the enemy character falls down due to the attack of the friendly character being hit is displayed at the progress speed V2, Figure 10-19, Figure 10-21, Figure 10-23, Figure 10-25 and Figure 10-27 (E) to Figure 10-27 (G), Figure 10-30 (F) to Figure 10-30 (H) ), FIGS. 10-32(E) to 10-32(G), and FIGS. 10-35(D) to 10-35(F), in the failure notification effect, a moving image when the ally character falls down is executed at the progress speed V1, when the loss notification performance is executed, the display of the performance moving image of the loss notification performance is not executed at the progress speed V2, so that the player is dissatisfied. can be prevented from becoming excessively high, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when the result of the variable display of super reach is executed and the loss notification effect is executed, the display of the effect animation of the loss notification effect is executed at the progress speed V1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a part of the super reach variable display, the display of the effect animation of the loss notification effect may be executed at a progressing speed V2 slower than V1. By doing so, it is possible to produce variations in the production of the failure notification production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the third speed in the present invention is set as the progressing speed V1 of the effect moving image during the big hit notification effect, and the progress speed V2 of the effect moving image during the big hit notification effect is set as the fourth speed in the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the advancing speed V1. Furthermore, the fourth speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V2 as long as it is slower than the third speed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25, during the second half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the operation promotion effect is executed when the display of the animation of the ready-to-win effect is being executed at the progress speed V2. Therefore, the effect of the fourth ready-to-win effect can be enhanced by the operation promoting effect.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, the display of the fourth ready-to-win effect animation is executed at the progress speed V2 during execution of the operation promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. During execution of the operation promoting effect, the display of the effect moving image of the fourth ready-to-win effect may be performed at the progress speed V1. Further, a suggestive performance suggesting that the operation promoting performance is executed can be executed before the operation prompting performance is executed, and during the execution period of the suggestive performance, the display of the performance animation of the fourth ready-to-reach performance is displayed at the progress speed V2. may be executed.

In addition to the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, a meter 079SG005M for notifying the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as the operation promotion effect of the characteristic portion 079SG. While the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb and the meter 079SG005M are being displayed, the display of the effect animation of the fourth ready-to-win effect is continuously executed at the progress speed V2, but does not proceed until the notification effect. . Furthermore, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, and when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B. , the same jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect is executed. Therefore, since the notification effect is not executed at a timing before the end of the operation accepting period of the push button 31B (until the end of the operation promotion effect), the push button is not operated by the player. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled during the operation reception period of the push button 31B.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 079SG, a configuration in which the push button 31B is used as the detection means in the present invention is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection means is a stick controller 31A or the like other than the push button 31B. In addition to the operating means, sensors capable of detecting the actions of the player, such as motion sensors and touch sensors, may be used.

10-18, 10-20, 10-22, 10-24, 10-26 (E) to 10-26 (G), 10-29 (C) to 10-29 (E), Figures 10-30 (B) to Figure 10-30 (D), Figures 10-31 (E) to Figure 10-31 (G), Figures 10-35 (A) to Figure 10-35 (C) ), in the big hit notification effect in this characteristic portion 079SG, the moving image of the part where the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character is displayed at the progress speed V1, while the moving image of the part where the enemy character falls down progresses. Displayed at speed V2. 10-19, 10-21, 10-23, 10-25 and 10-27 (E) to 10-27 (G), 10-30 (E) to 10- 30 (G), Figures 10-32 (E) to Figure 10-32 (G), Figures 10-35 (D) to Figure 10-35 (F), as shown in this characteristic portion 079SG deviation notification production A moving image is displayed at the progress speed V1 and is never displayed at the progress speed V2. That is, when the big win notification effect is executed, a part of the effect animation of the big win notification effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, thereby impressing the player that the big win game state is controlled. can.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, as a special effect that can be executed only when the variable display result is a big hit in the present invention, the still image display effect can be executed in pattern SG-2 (still image display effect in which colors are inverted). As a still image display effect, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In this characteristic portion 079SG, the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 is exemplified as a special effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect in the present invention is , an effect other than the static image display effect of pattern SG-2 (for example, an effect in which a specific character is displayed, an effect in which the color of the effect is gold or rainbow, etc.) may be executed.

In addition, the operation promotion effect of the characteristic portion 079SG includes a pattern SS-1 in which an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating a push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, and a push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F. It can be executed in any of the pattern SS-2 in which the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb larger than the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed as the operation prompting image. When the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1, the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be visually recognized through the effect image 079SG005E displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, while in pattern SS-2 When the operation promotion effect is executed, most of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is hidden by the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba. The visibility of the battle production of 4 reach production is low. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-17, the ratio of the variable display results to be a big hit when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2 is Since the variable display result is lower than the ratio of the big hit, the player can be made to pay attention to which pattern SS-1 or SS-2 the operation promoting performance is executed, and the interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33(C) to 10-33(E), when an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed as an operation prompting effect, the operation prompting image During the display of 079SG005Ba, the display of the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb shows the progress speed V2 (slow motion ) has been exemplified in which the visibility of the fourth reach effect animation (battle effect) being displayed is reduced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is pattern SS -2, in addition to the display of the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, by displaying a dedicated background image over the entire display area of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the fourth reach effect (battle production) may be completely invisible. In addition, during the period in which the effect video (battle effect) of the fourth reach effect is completely invisible due to the background image dedicated to pattern SS-2 of the operation promotion effect, the effect video of the fourth reach effect The display may be performed at the progress speed V1 (non-slow motion).

Further, in this characterizing portion 079SG, as the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, the second ready-to-win effect can be executed after the first ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect can be executed after the third ready-to-win effect. Furthermore, as the variable display of super reach, the variable display of super reach α1 for announcing a big win after the first half of the first reach performance execution period and the variable display of super reach β1 for notifying a big win after the first half of the third reach performance execution period. Display, variable display of super reach α2 that executes the first half of the first reach performance execution period after the first half of the first reach performance execution period and notifies of a failure, and second half of the third reach performance after the first half of the third reach performance execution period. Variable display of super ready-to-reach β2 for executing partial execution period and informing loss, variable display of super ready-to-win α3 to shift to second ready-to-win performance after first ready-to-reach performance exchange partial execution period, third ready-to-reach performance exchange partial execution period After that, it is possible to execute variable display of super reach α3 that shifts to the fourth reach production, and as shown in FIGS. When shifting to the execution period, when shifting from the first half of the ready-to-win production second half execution period to the first half of the second ready-to-win production execution period, when shifting from the third half of the ready-to-win production first half execution period to the second half of the third ready-to-win production execution period. , When shifting from the third ready-to-win performance second half execution period to the fourth ready-to-win performance first half execution period, the performance animation of each ready-to-win performance is executed at the progress speed V2, and from the first ready-to-win performance first half execution period to the first When shifting to the second half execution period of the ready-to-win performance, when shifting from the first half of the first ready-to-win performance to the first half of the second half of the ready-to-win performance, when shifting from the first half of the third ready-to-win performance to the second half of the third ready-to-win performance. , BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the reproduction speed V4 without changing from the other periods when shifting from the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance to the first half of the execution period of the fourth reach performance. Therefore, when shifting from the execution period of the first half of the first reach performance to the second half of the execution period of the first ready-reach performance, when shifting from the second half of the execution period of the first reach performance to the first half of the execution period of the second ready-reach performance, the third reach. To give a player a sense of incongruity when shifting from the performance first half execution period to the third ready-to-win performance second half execution period, and when shifting from the third ready-to-win performance second half execution period to the fourth ready-to-win performance first half execution period. You can prevent it from slipping. Furthermore, the display of the effect animation of each ready-to-win effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the branch of the ready-to-win effect drawn by the player can be easily recognized.

In addition, in the variable display of super reach of this characteristic part 079SG, a form in which two reach effects can be executed was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the variable display of super reach, three or more A ready-to-win effect may be executable, or only one ready-to-win effect may be executable.

Although the characteristic portion 079SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic portions, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention. included.

For example, in the characteristic part 079SG, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect are provided as the reach effects of the super reach. Although the display of is executed at the progress speed V2 (slow motion), the present invention is not limited to this, and a pattern ( A pattern in which the effect moving image is always displayed at the progress speed V1) and a pattern in which a part of the effect motion image is displayed at the progress speed V2 may be provided. Further, the content of the effect may be different between the ready-to-win effect in which a part of the effect moving image is displayed at the progress speed V2 and the ready-to-reach effect in which the effect moving image is not displayed at the progress speed V2. By doing so, it is possible to create variations in the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is always played at a constant playback speed (playback speed V4) regardless of whether or not the display of the effect moving image is executed at the progress speed V2. Although the form to be output is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, as a modification 079SG-1, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, the fourth reach In the first half of each ready-to-reach effect second half execution period of the performance, the playback speed is V4 from the speakers 8L and 8R in the same manner as the first-reach effect, second ready-to-reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth ready-to-reach effect first half execution period. While outputting the effect sound at, in the second half (slow motion period) of each reach effect second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect What is V4? The effect sound may be output at a different reproduction speed (for example, V5, which is slower than the reproduction speed V4). By doing so, the performance effect of the performance sound for the ready-to-win performance can be improved by varying the reproduction speed of the performance sound while the display of the performance animation of the ready-to-win performance is being executed at the progress speed V2. You can improve your interest.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-34, the first display area 079SG005F is visually recognized during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect by displaying an effect image 079SG005E, displaying an operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, or the like. While it is possible to reduce the visibility, the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, As a modification 079SG-2, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Furthermore, in the case where it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in this way, as shown in FIGS. , the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F may be reduced as part of the notification effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 (A) to 10-36 (D), when the second ready-to-win effect is being executed, when the second ready-to-win effect ends along with the still image display effect, A circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area as a part of the big hit notification effect or the losing notification effect, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed toward the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area 079SG005Sb. To go. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), as shown in FIGS. 10-36(E) and 10-36(F) Thus, it is necessary to notify that the big hit game state is controlled as the big hit notification effect, or that the big win game state is not controlled as the loss notification effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-37 (A) to 10-37 (D), when the fourth ready-to-win effect is being executed, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player pushes When the operation promoting effect is finished without operating the button 31B, as a part of the big hit notification effect or loss notification effect, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed secondly. Enlarged display is performed toward the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), as shown in FIGS. 10-37(E) and 10-37(F) Thus, it is necessary to notify that the big hit game state is controlled as the big hit notification effect, or that the big win game state is not controlled as the loss notification effect.

The effect image 079SG005Ea shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37 is an image based on the image data 2 shown in FIG. Thus, the visibility of only the first display area 079SG005F can be lowered, and the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be prevented from being lowered.

As described above, in this modification 079SG-2, while the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be changed, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, the second After the end of the ready-to-win effect or after the end of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F as part of the notification effect, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is reduced. does not change, the change in the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F makes it easier for the player to recognize the timing at which the notification effect is to be performed, and the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb increases. By not changing, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the pending display, the telop display, the variable display of the fourth symbol, and the like.

The effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is an image drawn as the image of the second image data shown in FIG. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is changed by drawing so as to enlarge the display toward the display area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is not changed, and the first display area 079SG005Sb is displayed. Only the visibility of the display area 079SG005F can be appropriately reduced, and the drawing of the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea as the second image data can be performed from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is lowered by being executed toward the area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the areas corresponding to the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be made difficult to change.

In addition, in the present modification 079SG-2, the mode of executing the operation promotion effect during the fourth reach effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is one of the notification effects. Can be run as part.

In addition, when the operation promotion effect is executed as part of the notification effect, as shown in FIGS. In addition, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging and displaying the effect image 079SG005Ea. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F, as shown in FIG. 10-38(D), an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and a meter 079SG005M are displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F as an operation prompting effect. do.

By displaying the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M as images based on the first image data shown in FIG.

After that, the player operates the push button 31B, or based on the end of the operation promotion performance without the player operating the push button 31B, the game is controlled to the big win game state, or the big win game state. is notified that it is not controlled by

As described above, in the modification 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as the image of the first image data are reduced. Since the visibility of is not lowered, the operation promoting effect can be emphasized with respect to the fourth ready-to-win effect, so that the player can be effectively encouraged to operate the push button 31B.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, when the static image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second ready-to-win effect, the variable display result always becomes a big hit. It is not limited to this, and as a modification 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the jackpot type of the jackpot is always The variable probability big win (furthermore, the variable probability big win A that is most advantageous to the player) may be achieved. Furthermore, as an effect pattern when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second ready-to-win effect, control is performed again to the jackpot game state after the failure notification effect is executed. It may be possible to execute a resurrection effect that notifies of. In addition, in the case where the resurrection effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 in this way, the case where the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot and a non-probability variation jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) A case where it is controlled to the big hit game state and a case where it is controlled to the big hit game state of probability variable big hit) may be provided. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the big win notification performance is executed after the still image display performance is executed in the pattern SS-2, so that the game interest can be improved. .

In addition, in the characterizing section 079SG, as an example of a mode in which a message indicating the gaming state is displayed as a telop displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T As the displayed telop, it is possible to display a message suggesting whether or not the variable display being executed or the variable display that has not yet started will be controlled to the jackpot game state, the title of the ready-to-win effect being executed, etc. good.

In addition, in the characterizing section 079SG, the form in which a telop can be displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T according to the state of the effect being executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T. The telops displayed in , are those that can specify the game state, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit in the variable display during execution (jackpot expectation), the explanation of the production during execution (especially the reach production), the reach production It may be an announcement effect or the like that can be executed from the timing before.

10-33 and 10-34, in the characteristic portion 079SG, during the period in which the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the operation promoting effect (the operation promoting image 079SG005Ba or the operation promoting display of the image 079SG005Bb) is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. good too.

10-33 and 10-34, in the characteristic portion 079SG, the image display device 5 displays an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb as an operation prompting effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is not limited to simply displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb. As an effect before displaying, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B are moved toward the central portion of the image display device 5, and finally the images of the push buttons 31B are overlapped and displayed to form an operation prompting image. An effect in which 079SG005Ba and an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb are displayed may be executed.

In addition, when the effect in which the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the central portion of the image display device 5 is executed as an indication effect of the operation promotion effect, for example, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B The movement display speed may decrease as the image approaches the center of the image display device 5 . By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the operation prompting effect will be executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. Although the flashing cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the number of colors (light emission colors) of the game effect lamps 9 is different from that when the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V1. may For example, when the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V1, the game effect lamp 9 can emit light in a plurality of colors, while the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a single color (for example, only white). By doing so, when the moving image display of the ready-to-win effect is executed at the progress speed V2, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to the emission color of the game effect lamp 9.例文帳に追加

Further, in the characterizing portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. Although the flashing cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be lengthened. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of unity between the display of the moving image of the ready-to-win effect and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. Later, an example is given in which decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in combination indicating a big win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in a combination indicating a big win. The timing may be during the ready-to-win effect.

In addition, the present invention is a gaming machine in which a player can select at least a part of effect sounds such as BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R during a game by operating an operation means that the player can operate. may be applied to By doing so, when the player has set the output of the effect sound that suits his/her preference, the speaker 8L is displayed when the moving image of each reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V1. , 8R is reproduced at the reproduction speed V4 without change, the effect sound is faster than the reproduction speed V4 even though the player himself/herself selects the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Also, it is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement due to low speed reproduction.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as the end suggestion effect in the present invention, it is possible to execute the effect in which the friend character is defeated by the enemy character during the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect and the second half of the third reach effect. is executed, the variable display result is always lost, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the first reach effect latter half execution period and the third reach effect latter half execution period After the effect of defeating the ally character by the enemy character is executed, the display on the image display device 5 is temporarily switched to the display of the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect, and then the variable display result is the effect indicating the big win. (For example, a case of executing a resurrection effect) may be provided.

When executing the resurrection effect in this manner, the game effect lamp 9 is lit and blinked prior to the display of the moving image of the resurrection effect on the image display device 5, so that the resurrection effect is given to the player. may be made to recognize that is executed. Furthermore, as the effect mode of the resurrection effect, for example, the effect may be such that the ally character attacks the enemy character again and defeats the enemy character. In particular, when the resurrection effect is executed, a part of the moving image of the resurrection effect (for example, the moving image of the scene in which the enemy character falls down) is displayed at the progress speed V2 so as to enhance the effect of the resurrection effect. good too.

In addition, although a plurality of characteristic portions and modifications are disclosed in this specification, the game machine of the present invention is implemented by combining two or more characteristic portions and modifications from these plurality of characteristic portions and modifications. You may

For example, the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 079SG may be a pachinko game machine that can change the jackpot probability by changing the set values as shown in FIGS. In such a case, for example, in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1, a pattern is provided in which the variable display results are not displayed, and the pachinko game machine 1 is set to a high setting value (eg, 6) that is advantageous for the player. is set, even if the variable display results of super reach α1 and super reach β1 are out of range at a higher rate than when other setting values are set in the pachinko game machine 1 good. By doing so, it is possible to use the fact that the variable display result is wrong in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 as a suggestion that a high setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the fact that the variable display result is wrong while suppressing the player's interest in the fact that the variable display result is wrong in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1. It becomes possible.

Further, in the characterizing portion 079SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention.

Moreover, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and that is capable of outputting an effect sound. Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R and voice synthesis IC079SG132, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the voice control board 13), and display means capable of displaying effect moving images (for example, image display device 5 ), and an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) for displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means in accordance with the display of the effect animation of the character. (for example, the production control CPU 120), and the production execution means can display, on the display means, a production moving image whose production progress speed is the first speed in the first period of the predetermined production ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution period of each of the first reach production, the second reach production, the third reach production, and the fourth reach production, the animation of each reach production is displayed. The part displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1), in the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the progress speed of the effect is at the second speed slower than the first speed. A certain effect animation can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect During the execution period of the second half of (2), the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2), and the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect is performed in the first period and the second period In either case, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach effect, the second reach effect , the third ready-to-reach effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect, respectively, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period, BGM, effect sounds, etc. are output from the speakers 8L, 8R at the normal reproduction speed V4. section), the sound output means includes a reproduction circuit for reproducing sound (for example, a speech synthesis IC079SG132), an amplifier circuit for amplifying the sound reproduced by the reproduction circuit (for example, an amplifier circuit 079SG134), and the amplifier circuit and speakers (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that output sounds amplified by the player, and can be operated by the player (for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.), and a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in the operation part effect pattern) as a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates. Vibration effect execution means (for example, operation unit effect control pattern and variable display Effect control CPU 120, etc., which executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the effect control pattern), and a light emission effect that causes the operation means to emit light according to the predetermined vibration effect (for example, in the operation part effect pattern light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the included light emission color) can be executed (for example, the variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) Production control CPU 120 etc. for executing medium production processing) and specific production execution means (for example and the production control CPU 120, etc., which executes the production process during variable display in step S172 based on the variable display production control pattern determined in step AKS203. When the vibration effect is executed, the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher (for example, the reliability of the big hit according to the operation part effect pattern, etc.), and the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect. , Depending on the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of control to the advantageous state differs (for example, the emission color included in the operation part effect pattern and the jackpot reliability according to the use of the operation part effect pattern, etc. ), the vibration performance executing means can execute the special vibration performance in accordance with the execution of the specific performance (for example, execution of the vibration performance during periods AKZ01 to AKZ05), and the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance. (For example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44).

According to such a configuration, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, the highly reproducible production sound can be output from the speaker at an appropriate volume. In addition, the game interest can be improved by making the player pay attention to the vibration mode of the vibration performance, the light emission mode of the light emission performance, and the execution timing of the vibration performance.

In other words, by not changing the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, it is possible to make the game machine less likely to make the player feel uncomfortable, and the ratio of controlling the predetermined vibration effect to an advantageous state is high. Since it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the lighting mode and the vibration performance are executed at the execution timing, and whether or not the special vibration performance is to be executed with the execution of the specific performance, the amusement of the game can be improved. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less likely to give the player a sense of discomfort when installed in a game arcade and that easily attracts the interest of the player.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of the game while making it difficult for the player to feel discomfort in the performance, it is possible to control the game machine to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player. A game machine (for example, pachinko game machine 1, etc.) includes operation means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by a player, and a predetermined vibration effect (for example, Vibration effect execution capable of executing vibration motor 131 driving by vibration pattern included in operation part effect pattern, etc.) and special vibration effect (for example, driving vibration motor 131 by vibration control data included in variable display effect control pattern, etc.) Means (for example, the production control CPU 120 for executing the production process during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation section production control pattern and the variable display production control pattern determined in step AKS203), and the predetermined vibration Light-emitting effect executing means (for example, determined in step AKS203) capable of executing a light-emitting effect (for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern) that causes the operation means to emit light according to the effect Effect control CPU 120 etc. that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern), and a specific effect (for example SP reach A reach effect, jackpot) according to the progress of the game Confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, etc.) can be executed (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing effect processing during variable display in step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) and, when the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (for example, a big hit according to the operation part effect pattern etc. reliability, etc.), the ratio of control to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, depending on the operation unit effect pattern jackpot reliability according to the use of the included light emission color and operation unit production pattern), and the vibration production execution means can execute the special vibration production along with the execution of the specific production (for example, during the period AKZ01 to AKZ05 Execution of vibration production, etc.), the predetermined vibration production, and the special vibration A gaming machine with different vibration modes depending on the performance (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44, etc.) can be mentioned. Examples of the form examples of these gaming machines will be described below as other form examples.

(Description of characteristic part regarding setting suggestion effect)
Characteristic portions relating to setting suggestion effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below. In this characteristic portion, it is possible to execute a setting suggesting effect that suggests the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 at a predetermined rate during execution of the variable display.

FIG. 11-1 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step S201). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbols, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbols, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, the advance notice effect determination process is executed (step S202). The advance notice effect determination processing makes it possible to decide the advance notice effect included in the advantageous suggesting effect.

After the announcement effect determination process is executed, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S203). The production control pattern may include a special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, a notice production control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various production executions. For example, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, select one of the prepared special figure variation production control patterns and set it as a usage pattern. Further, one of a plurality of prepared notice effect control patterns may be selected and set as a use pattern in accordance with the determination result of the notice effect determination process in step S202. In addition, it is not limited to setting a separate production control pattern as the special figure fluctuation time production control pattern and the notice production control pattern, but one production control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution setting of each production is set. There may be.

When the production control pattern is determined by step S203, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the initialization of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area (production control timer setting unit, etc.) of RAM122 A value is set (step S204). Also, the setting for starting the variation of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 is performed (step S205). At this time, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation production control pattern) determined in step S203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. The variation of the decorative design may be started in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5. FIG.

Subsequently, a pending display update setting at the start of variable display is set (step S206). For example, in the pending display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part corresponding to the pending number "1" (the display part at the left end) is erased (digested), and the other pending numbers "2" to The pending display in the display portion corresponding to "4" or the like is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the pending display is shifted. In the active display section provided on the screen of the image display device 5, active display corresponding to the erased (extinguished) pending display in the pending display area may be performed. In addition, when the number of pending memories is "0", if the variable display is started immediately based on the occurrence of the first start winning or the second starting winning, the active display area will be displayed without updating the pending display. A setting may be made to update the active display in the . After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S207), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 11B is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stop symbol determination process. In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is executed (step S221). Whether or not the ready-to-win effect of super reach is executed can be determined based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command transmitted from the main substrate 11, for example.

When the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop symbol for non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop symbol determination process is terminated. At the time of non-reach, the variable display result becomes "losing". The normal reach includes a case where the variable display result is "big hit" and a case where the variable display result is "loss". In the non-ready-to-win state in which the variable display mode of the decoration design does not become the ready-to-win mode, the fixed decoration design of the non-ready-to-win combination is stop-displayed as the final stop design. The final stop symbol at the time of non-reach is determined so that the "left" and "right" ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R are different (mismatched) ornamental symbols. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result is "losing", the determined decoration pattern of the reach-losing combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of reach-losing. The final stop symbol at the time of reach loss is determined so that the "left" and "right" ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R have the same (matching) ornamental symbol. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result is "big hit", the determined decoration pattern of the big win combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of the big win. The final stop symbols at the time of the big hit are determined to be the same (matching) decoration symbols in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

When the ready-to-win effect of super-ready-to-win is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop symbol for super-to-win is determined (step S223). At the time of super reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "loss". At the time of super reach when the variable display result is "losing", the determined decoration pattern of the reach losing combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of reaching losing. When the variable display result is "big win", the determined decoration pattern of the big win combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of the big win.

At the time of super reach, regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "losing", the same (matching) decorative pattern is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. It is stopped and displayed as a fixed decoration pattern. The left and right decoration patterns that constitute such a reach-losing combination or a big-hit combination are also called reach patterns. Decorative patterns that can be determined as ready-to-win patterns may include a plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as seven types of decorative patterns corresponding to numbers 1 to 7, for example. The decoration pattern corresponding to the number may be only the effect image showing the number, or may be the effect image showing various characters in addition to the number. The ready-to-win pattern is determined as one of a plurality of decoration patterns by referring to a ready-to-win pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the ready-to-win pattern. You can do it like this. The numerical data indicating the random number for determining the ready-to-win pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

In the ready-to-win pattern determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols to be ready-to-win symbols may differ depending on whether the variable display result is "losing" or "big win". For example, when the variable display result is "losing", the determination rate of the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, and the number 6. As it becomes, the determination ratio of the decorative design becomes lower, and the determination ratio of the decorative design corresponding to the number 7 becomes the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "big hit", the decision rate of the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, and the number 2, number 3, number 4, number 5, and number 6 are the lowest. As the number becomes , the ratio of determining the decorative pattern increases, and the determining ratio of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number of 7 becomes the highest. With such a determination ratio setting, when the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win pattern, the variable display result is "big win" and the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state is the highest. , 5, 4, 3, and 2, the variable display result when stop-displayed as a ready-to-win pattern becomes "big win" and the ratio of control to the big win game state is low. Thus, when the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win pattern, the variable display result becomes "big win", and the ratio of control to the big win game state becomes the lowest. In the ready-to-win pattern determination table, regardless of whether the variable display result is "losing" or "big win", the same number of determination values may be assigned to decorative patterns to be ready-to-win symbols. The number of determination values assigned to each decorative design to be a ready-to-win pattern may be different, or the number of determination values to be assigned may be the same regardless of the decorative design to be a ready-to-win design. Depending on the type of jackpot, the determination ratio of decorative symbols to be ready-to-win symbols may differ.

After step S223, it is determined whether or not the determined ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the reach symbol is a decoration symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. If the ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of setting suggestion effect is determined according to whether or not setting suggestion effect is to be executed (step S225). Whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect is determined by, for example, referring to a setting suggestion effect execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution. You can do so. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . As the presence/absence of the setting suggesting effect, one of "no effect" in which the setting suggesting effect is not executed, or "with effect" in which the setting suggesting effect is executed is determined.

Based on the determination result of step S225, it is determined whether or not it is determined to "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect (step S226). If it is determined to be "no effect" that does not execute the setting suggestion effect (step S226; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. If it is determined that there is an effect (step S226; Yes), the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S227). The effect control CPU 120 may receive a setting value notification command transmitted from the main substrate 11 side when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and store the notified setting value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 . Accordingly, in step S227, the setting values stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step S227, after determining the suggested setting pattern (step S228), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. The suggested setting pattern is determined by referring to a suggested setting pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating random values for determining the suggested setting pattern. It should be determined by The numerical data indicating the random number value for setting suggestion pattern determination may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

FIG. 11-3 shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion effect execution determination table. For example, the ROM 121 pre-stores table data constituting a determination table TA01 shown in FIG. 11-3 as a setting suggestion effect execution determination table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the determination table TA01 or the like. In the determination table TA01, the number of determination values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether the variable display result is "losing" or "big win". For example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination ratio of "with effect" for executing the setting suggesting effect is higher than when the variable display result is "losing". In the setting of such a determination ratio, when the setting suggesting performance is executed, the variable display result becomes ``big hit'' and the ratio of being controlled to the big winning game state becomes higher than when the setting suggesting performance is not executed. In addition, in the setting suggestion effect execution determination table, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of setting suggestion effect may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is "losing" or "big hit". .

FIG. 11-4(A) shows a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. These setting suggestion patterns have different suggested contents depending on whether or not the symbol display color is to be changed, and the display color when it is to be changed. The symbol display color is a display color of a decorative symbol stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win symbol, and can be changed to suggestive display colors including copper color, silver color, and gold color in addition to the normal display color red. The pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color, suggesting that the player has a low expectation, which is an advantageous set value. Pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper, suggesting that the set value is 2 or more. Pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the player has a high degree of expectation, which is a set value that is advantageous to the player. Pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, suggesting confirmation of 6, which is the highest setting. In this way, in the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern, it is possible to suggest the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 according to whether or not the pattern display color has changed and the pattern display color after the change.

FIG. 11-4(B) shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, the ROM 121 pre-stores table data constituting a determination table TA11 shown in FIG. 11-4(B) as a suggested setting pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stop symbol determination process, a suggested setting pattern is determined by referring to the determination table TA11. In the determination table TA11, the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern varies depending on the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

When the setting suggesting performance using the ready-to-win pattern is executed, the ready-to-win pattern becomes a decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7, so that the ratio of control to the big win game state is high. When the setting suggesting effect is executed in pattern RE-0, the degree of expectation, which is a setting value advantageous to the player, is low, and when the setting suggesting effect is executed in pattern RE-1, the set value is 2 or more. One thing is certain. In addition, when the setting suggesting performance is executed in the pattern RE-2, the degree of expectation, which is a set value advantageous to the player, is high, and when the setting suggesting performance is executed in the pattern RE-3, the set value is the highest. 6 is determined. In this way, the ready-to-win symbols when the variable display of decorative symbols is the ready-to-win mode include a symbol display mode for suggesting control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a symbol display mode for 7. A symbol display mode for suggesting the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 while suggesting the control of the jackpot game state such as decoration symbols corresponding to the numbers is included. When the ready-to-win pattern is a decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7, the ready-to-win pattern is displayed in the normal display color to suggest control of the jackpot game state, and then the pattern display color is changed. Suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state are continuously made, and suggestions regarding the set values are made.

The setting-suggestion effect can be executed in different effect modes according to the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the pattern display color is not changed to copper because the pattern RE-1 is not determined as the suggested setting pattern. Thus, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, as a pattern display mode when the ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, the pattern display color is changed to copper color or not. When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 6, the pattern display color is not changed to gold because the pattern RE-3 is not determined as the suggested setting pattern. Thus, depending on whether the set value set in the pachinko game machine is 6 or not, the symbol display color is changed to gold as the symbol display mode when the ready-to-win symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. It depends on whether or not it is changed to

The setting suggesting effect is instead of changing the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decoration symbol stopped and displayed as the ready-to-win symbol, or in addition to changing the symbol display color. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape and pattern of the decoration pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, display of a background image, an outer frame image, or any other effect image, output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of decorative light emitters such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED, operation of a movable member for effect, and the like. It may be one that changes the rendering mode by any rendering device, such as a combination of some or all. Setting suggestion effects and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko game machine 1 are arbitrary data related to the effect control, arbitrary data not related to the effect control, or data combining these are predetermined for effect execution. It suffices if it can be executed when one or more conditional expressions are satisfied. The effect of changing the symbol display color is also called a change effect.

The plurality of suggested setting patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when the game is controlled to the big win game state, and a pattern that can be determined even when the game is not controlled to the big win game state. For example, pattern RE-0 and pattern RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined rate even when the variable display result is "loss", whereas pattern RE-2 and pattern RE-3 are variable display It may be possible to make the decision possible only when the result is a "big hit" and to make the decision impossible when the variable display result is a "loss". In this case, the pattern RE-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern RE-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the current setting.

FIG. 11-5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process as the effect process during variable display. In the variable display production process, for example, based on the timer value of the production control process timer, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed (step S241). When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, off, or blinked. It is sufficient that various effects can be executed by a predetermined effect device by operating a movable member for effect such as the movable body 32, or by combining some or all of them.

In the effect processing during variable display, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice effect period (step S242). If it is the notice effect period (step S242; Yes), control is performed to execute the notice effect (step S243). If it is not the notice effect period (step S242; No), or after performing the control of step S243, it is determined whether or not it is the ready-to-win effect period (step S244). When it is the ready-to-win effect period (step S244; Yes), control to execute the ready-to-win effect is performed (step S245). By the control of step S245, when the ready-to-win performance after changing the symbol display color is executed after the decoration pattern to be the ready-to-win pattern is stop-displayed, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state are made, and the pachinko game machine 1 is operated. Suggestions regarding settings can be made.

When it is not the ready-to-win effect period (step S244; No), or after performing the control of step S245, it is determined whether or not it is the change effect period (step S246). The change effect period may be determined in advance as an effect execution period for changing the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern is executed. When it is the change effect period (step S246; Yes), control to execute the change effect is performed (step S247). If it is not a change effect period (step S246; No), after performing the control of step S247, for example, based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, etc., Other, variable of the decorative pattern After performing control for executing an effect during the variable display including the display operation (step S248), the effect processing during the variable display is terminated.

The change effect period may be set to different time lengths according to the effect mode of the change effect. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period longer than the first period, and the pattern RE- In the case of pattern 2, the change effect period may be set to the third period longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change effect period may be set to the longest fourth period. In general, when an effect (advantageous effect) is executed, the player shoots an image or video of the effect with a portable terminal owned by the player, and sends it to SNS (Social There is a tendency to post on membership registration websites such as Networking Service and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, there arises a problem that an appropriate photographing time cannot be secured. On the other hand, the effect (unfavorable effect) that is often performed even in a disadvantageous situation does not arouse the desire to shoot, so if the execution period of the disadvantageous effect is long, the player will rather feel uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, the execution period of advantageous effects is lengthened to secure the photographing time, and the execution period of disadvantageous effects is made shorter than that of advantageous effects to reduce discomfort. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking an effect that is advantageous to the player, and to secure the shooting time. In addition, since the photographing time can be secured, the photographed images and moving images are made public by the players on the Internet, and public interest in the pachinko game machine 1 can be heightened. In addition, in many cases, since the images including which pachinko game machine 1 in which game hall were photographed are disclosed, from the game hall side, the game hall is advertised by the player. become. In this way, by securing the photographing time when the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the player but also to the game arcade side.

When the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not a design confirmation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received (step S249). If no pattern confirmation command is received (step S249; No), the effect process during variable display is terminated and the game waits. After the variable display time elapses, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving the design confirmation command, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the fact that the design confirmation command could not be received normally. You may do so. When the design confirmation command is received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop design (determined decoration design) which is the display result in the variable display of the decoration design (step S250). Subsequently, a certain period of time is set in advance as a wait time for receiving a jackpot start designation command (step S251). Also, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is the value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S252), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

FIG. 11-6 shows an execution example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 11-6(A) shows an effect execution example HD101 in which the form of the variable display of decorative symbols is the ready-to-win mode and the ready-to-win is established. When the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5R, the ready-to-win is established and the ready-to-win performance of the normal ready-to-win is executed. FIG. 11-6(B) shows an effect execution example HD102 in which the ready-to-win effect of normal reach is advanced to the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. On the display screen of the image display device 5, the decoration pattern is displayed in a reduced size, and the effect image in the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is displayed. FIG. 11-6(C) shows an effect execution example HD103 in which a change effect as a setting suggestion effect is executed. An effect display corresponding to the change effect is displayed superimposed on the stop-displayed ready-to-win pattern. In addition, by displaying an effect image announcing a message such as "Change the symbol display color!", a suggestion to change the symbol display color is made.

FIG. 11-6 (D1) shows an effect execution example HD111 in which the pattern display color does not change due to the pattern RE-0. FIG. 11-6 (D2) shows an effect execution example HD112 in which the pattern display color changes to copper by the pattern RE-1. FIG. 11-6(D3) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color changes to silver by the pattern RE-2. FIG. 11-6 (D4) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color changes to gold by the pattern RE-3. In the effect execution example HD111, the display color of the ready-to-win pattern does not change due to the pattern RE-0, and remains red, which is the normal display color. In this way, a failure effect (fake effect) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the player's expectation, which is an advantageous set value, is low. In effect execution example HD112, pattern RE-1 changes the display color of the ready-to-win pattern to copper, suggesting that the set value is 2 or more. In effect execution example HD113, pattern RE-2 changes the display color of the ready-to-win pattern to silver, suggesting that the player has a high expectation, which is a set value that is advantageous to the player. In effect execution example HD114, pattern RE-3 changes the display color of the ready-to-win pattern to gold, suggesting that 6, which is the highest set value, is fixed.

The setting suggesting effect suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit by any desired effect such as a pseudo continuous effect or a pre-reading notice effect, in addition to a change effect in which the display color of the ready-to-win pattern can be changed, and the set value of the pachinko game machine 1. You may enable it to make a suggestion about. It may be an effect in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested after the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state is made during execution of the variable display. In the case of executing an arbitrary performance, the suggestion about the control of the jackpot game state is made and then the suggestion about the control of the jackpot game state is continued, and the suggestion about the control of the jackpot game state is continued and the pachinko game is performed. It may also include a case of suggesting a setting value of the gaming machine 1 . In the case of executing an arbitrary performance, after making a suggestion about the control of the big win game state, when the suggestion ends, and when the suggestion about the control of the big win game state is continued and the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is made. It may include a case of making a suggestion.

The suggestion about the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, suggesting whether or not the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. . For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different decision ratios depending on whether or not the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 have been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the effect is made so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed by suggesting the effect mode of the pattern determined at a high rate. can be diversified to improve amusement.

During execution of the variable display, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state may be made, while suggestions regarding the set values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the pachinko machine executes a big hit start effect (fanfare effect) and a big hit effect (such as a effect corresponding to the first and second rounds). A setting value of 1 may be suggested. There may be a case where the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested without suggesting the control of the jackpot game state.

In place of part or all of the suggestion about the control of the big win game state, or together with part or all of the suggestion about the control of the big win game state, a suggestion about control of a state advantageous to the player different from the big win game state is provided. can be anything. For example, it may suggest a variable probability state to be controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as the advantageous state, a suggestion may be made according to whether or not control is to be performed regarding a state in which an arbitrary game value that is advantageous to the player is awarded.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 10SH)
Next, the characterizing portion 10SH of this embodiment will be described.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player, as described above.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 10SH includes operation means that can be operated by the player. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like.

The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 10SH includes vibration effect executing means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 10SH includes a line-of-sight guidance effect executing means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operation means. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B.

The game machine according to the characteristic part 10SH is expected to be controlled in an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed rather than when the vibration effect is not executed. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 has a higher jackpot reliability when the vibration performance is executed than when the vibration performance is not executed.

The vibration effect executing means related to the characteristic portion 10SH can execute the vibration effect at the first timing and at the second timing after the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the timing T2 when the reach is established, and the normal reach after the timing T1 and the timing T2. The vibration performance can be executed at any one of the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win performance and the timing T4 during execution of the super ready-to-win performance.

The vibration effect executing means related to the characteristic portion 10SH can execute the vibration effect in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 pushes the push button 31B regardless of whether it is timing T1 or timing T2 or timing T3 or timing T4. Vibration production can be performed in a mode in which the vibration time and the luminescent color are common.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means related to the characteristic portion 10SH does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the timing T1 and the timing T2.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means related to the characteristic portion 10SH can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 and the timing T4.

The vibration effect executing means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 10SH includes specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect different from the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach effect of super reach.

The vibration effect executing means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect when the reach effect of super reach is being executed.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 10SH includes display means for displaying. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5 that displays various effect images.

The display of the line-of-sight guidance effect related to the characteristic portion 10SH has a lower priority than the display of the predetermined information, and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information. For example, the performance image of the line-of-sight guidance effect has a lower priority than the constant small pattern, the pending number display, and various error notifications, and has a higher priority than the pending display, the active display, the background image, and the decoration pattern.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 12-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 10SH, showing the arrangement layout of the main members.

The push button 31B is made of a translucent member, and a game effect lamp 9B for game effects is provided inside the push button 31B. According to such a configuration, the push button 31B can be illuminated by turning on the game effect lamp 9B.

Further, the push button 31B is configured to vibrate by being driven by the vibration motor 131. As shown in FIG. The vibration motor 131 is composed of, for example, an eccentric motor in which a weight with a biased center of gravity is provided on the motor shaft, and is provided inside or close to the push button 31B. In addition, a plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided in order to diversify the vibration mode of the push button 31B.

Game effect lamps 9L and 9R for game effects are provided at predetermined positions of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The game effect lamp 9L is provided on the left side of the push button 31B and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the outside. Similarly, the game effect lamp 9R is provided on the right side of the push button 31B and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the outside. A plurality of LEDs are built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R along the extending direction of the game effect lamps 9L and 9R.

(Substrate configuration)
FIG. 12-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 10SH.

The display control unit 123 supplies lamp signals to the lamp control board 14 in order to turn on/off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamps 9B, 9L and 9R. The lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R are turned on/off. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls lighting/extinguishing of the lamp. It should be noted that the lighting/extinguishing control of the lamp may be executed by the effect control CPU 120 .

The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a motor control board 130, for example. The display control unit 123 supplies a motor signal to the motor control board 130 in order to drive the vibration motor 131 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The motor control board 130 is equipped with various circuits for driving the vibration motor 131, and drives the vibration motor 131 in a manner specified by the motor signal. The display control unit 123 controls the vibration motor 131 in this way. Note that the control of the vibration motor 131 may be executed by the effect control CPU 120 .

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 12-3 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing related to the characteristic portion 10SH. The effect control CPU 120 executes the process shown in FIG. 12-3 in the variable display start setting process of FIG.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol based on the variation pattern of the variable display to be executed from now on and the display result of the variable display to be executed from now on (step 10SHS1). A variation pattern and a display result are transmitted from the main substrate 11 at the start of variable display, and specified by the effect control command analyzed by the command analysis process. The final stop pattern is prepared in advance in the ROM 121 according to the combination of the variation pattern and the display result, and is determined by lottery or the like. Lottery here refers to a determination method based on random numbers and a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121 . As the random number value, one of random numbers for effect updated by the random number circuit 124 or random number update process for effect is used.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the vibration effect, and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when executing the vibration effect (step 10SHS2). The vibration effect is a effect in which the push button 31B vibrates. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration effect that does not interlock with the notice effect. In the process of step 10SHS2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the vibration effect, and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is executed, based on a random number and a lottery based on a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. decide.

In the table referred to in the lottery of step 10SHS2, when the vibration performance is executed, the reliability of the big win becomes higher than when the vibration performance is not executed, and when the vibration performance is executed, the reliability of the big win depends on the execution pattern of the vibration performance. is different, the determination value to be compared with the random value may be assigned to the determination result of the presence or absence of the vibration performance and the execution pattern of the vibration performance when the vibration performance is executed.

Here, the reliability of a certain effect A is, for example, (the probability that the effect A will be executed when the display result is a “big hit”)×(the probability that the display result will be a “big hit”)/{(display result Probability that production A will be executed when is a "jackpot") x (Probability that the display result will be a "jackpot") + (Probability that production A will be executed when the display result is not a "jackpot") x ( Probability that the display result will not be a "big hit")}.

Therefore, in the table referred to in the lottery of step 10SHS2, the vibration effect of each execution pattern is displayed when the display result is "big win" so that the reliability of the big win corresponding to the execution pattern of the vibration effect becomes a predetermined value. It is sufficient if the probability of execution and the probability of execution of the vibration effect of each execution pattern when the display result is not a "big win" are defined.

(Details of vibration production and reliability of jackpot)
FIG. 12-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the vibration effect and the reliability of the big win. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment, according to the combination of the execution timing of the vibration effect, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, and the light emission color of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, executes patterns SE1 to A plurality of types of vibration effects of SE10 can be executed.

The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect at either the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started or the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established. That is, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established when executing the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Further, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decoration pattern is started when executing the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE1 to SE3 as the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE4 as the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the reach is established.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is, after the timing T1 and the timing T2, the timing T3 during execution of the reach effect of the normal reach and the timing T4 during execution of the reach effect of the super reach. Vibration effect can be executed at any timing. That is, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win when executing the vibration effect at the timing T3 when the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach is being executed. Also, the performance control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration performance at timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win performance of normal reach when executing the vibration performance at timing T4 during execution of ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win. The production control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration production of the execution patterns SE5 to SE7 as the vibration production at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win production of normal reach. Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE8 to SE10 as the vibration effect at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach.

According to such a configuration, since the vibrating effect may be executed while the ready-to-win effect of the super reach is being executed, it is possible to improve the amusement.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the timing T3 when the normal reach reach effect is being executed, or the super reach reach effect is being executed. , irrespective of whether it is timing T4 or not, there is a vibration production in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds. and a vibrating effect in which the is illuminated in red. The production control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration productions of the execution patterns SE1, SE5, and SE8 as vibration productions in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white. is. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effects of the execution patterns SE2, SE6, and SE9 as vibration effects in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. is.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment vibrates the push button 31B for three seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit light in rainbow colors regardless of the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed. Vibration production can be executed. The production control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the vibration production of the execution patterns SE3, SE4, SE7, and SE10 as a vibration production in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors. It is possible.

In this embodiment, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and vibrates for 3 seconds more than when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit white light is executed. The reliability of the big hit is higher when the vibration performance is executed in which the push button 31B emits red light. Further, in this embodiment, the reliability of the vibrating effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and lighting the push button 31B in rainbow colors is 100%, and the display result is "big hit". to be reported deterministically.

According to such a configuration, when the push button 31B vibrates, attention can be paid to what color the push button 31B emits light and how many seconds the push button 31B vibrates.

Further, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit white light is executed, and when the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and is pushed When the vibration effect of making the button 31B emit red light is executed, the reliability of the big hit differs depending on the execution timing of the vibration effect. For example, even if the vibration effect is the same mode, it is better to execute it at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started than when it is executed at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach. Highly reliable. Further, even if the vibration effect of the same mode is executed, it is executed at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, rather than at the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. , The reliability of the jackpot is high.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to heighten expectations for the execution of the vibration effect at the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Further, when the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes a predetermined ready-to-win mode when the vibration effect is not executed at the timing T1, the ready-to-reach effect of the super ready-to-win is performed instead of the ready-to-reach effect of the normal reach at the time T3 during execution of the ready-to-reach effect. It is possible to heighten expectations for the execution of the vibration presentation at timing T4 during execution. Then, when the vibrating performance is not actually executed at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win performance of the normal reach, the expectation for the execution of the vibration performance at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-reach performance of the super ready-to-reach is heightened. be able to.

Incidentally, the reliability of the big hit of the vibrating effect that can be executed at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach should be higher than the reliability of the normal reach. In addition, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of ready-to-win productions of normal reach, and if the reliability of the big hit differs depending on the type of ready-to-win production of normal reach, the reliability of the big hit of vibration production that can be executed at timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win production of normal reach is , it may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the ready-to-win performance of the normal reach being executed at that time, or higher than the jackpot reliability of any kind of ready-to-win performance of the normal reach.

Similarly, the reliability of the big hit of the vibrating effect that can be executed at the timing T4 when the ready-to-win effect of the super-reach is being executed should be higher than the reliability of the super-reach. In addition, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of ready-to-win performances of super ready-to-win, and when the reliability of the big hit differs depending on the type of ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win, the big hit of vibrating performance to be executed at timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win. The reliability should be higher than the big win reliability of the ready-to-win performance of the super-ready-to-win being executed at that time, or higher than the big-hit reliability of any kind of ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win.

According to such a configuration, the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach and the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-reach effect of the super ready-to-win can be regarded as the chance-up effect. can do.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T2 when reach is established, the vibration effect is always executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors. Then, it is definitely notified that the display result will be a "jackpot".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to heighten expectations for the execution of the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established, not at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Then, when the vibration performance is actually not executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the expectation for the execution of the vibration performance at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win is established can be further heightened.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to intricately change the sense of expectation for the execution of the vibration effect as the variable display of the decoration pattern progresses.

In addition, the probability of executing the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits light in rainbow colors is sufficiently low compared to the probability of executing the vibration effect of other modes. By stipulating, it is possible to heighten interest when it is definitely reported that the display result will be a "big hit".

Further, in this embodiment, when the push button 31B is vibrated as a vibration effect, the push button 31B is always illuminated.

With such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating, and increase the chances of recognizing that the push button 31B is vibrating.

Returning to the description of FIG. 12-3, after that, according to the determination result of step 10SHS2, the effect control CPU 120 controls the timing T3 during execution of the normal reach reach effect and the super reach effect in this variable display. It is determined whether or not to execute the vibration effect at the timing T4 during execution or at any one of the timings (step 10SHS3).

Then, when the vibration effect is executed at one of the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of normal reach and the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach (step 10SHS3; Yes), effect The control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect (step 10SHS4). The line-of-sight guidance effect is a effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the push button 31B. In the processing of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect by means of a random number and a lottery based on a table prepared in the ROM 121 in advance. In the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4, the determination ratio of presence/absence of visual guidance effect is set regardless of which mode of vibration effect is executed. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 determines presence or absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect at the same rate regardless of which mode the current vibration effect is.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at either timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of normal reach or timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. In addition, it is possible to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the push button 31B before the vibration effect is executed, so that the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently enhanced.

On the other hand, when the vibration performance is executed at either timing T1 at which the variable display of the decoration pattern is started or timing T2 at which the ready-to-win state is established, the visual guidance performance is not executed.

Here, when the display result is derived and displayed, the true display result may be derived and displayed after the display result of "missing" is displayed. Therefore, even though the display result of the previous variable display is derived and displayed and the current variable display is started, when the visual guidance effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, There is a possibility of causing a misunderstanding as if a relief effect was being executed in the previous variable display. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, such misunderstanding can be prevented.

Also, if the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed at the timing T2 at which the ready-to-win state is established, there is a possibility that it may not be possible to appropriately recognize that the state of variable display of decorative symbols has become the predetermined ready-to-win state. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the state of variable display of the decoration pattern has become the predetermined ready-to-win state. .

Returning to the description of FIG. 12-3, when the vibration effect is not executed at one of the timing T3 during execution of the reach effect of normal reach and the timing T4 during execution of reach effect of super reach ( Step 10SHS3; No) or after executing the process of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not other effects such as ready-to-win effects are to be executed, and the mode of the effect to be executed (step 10SHS5). Specifically, a lottery determines whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects and the mode thereof. At this time, by varying the determination ratio in the lottery according to the display result of this time, the variation pattern of this time, etc., the reliability of the big win can be varied according to the presence or absence of execution of the advance notice performance or the like and its mode. Also, when the current pattern designates reach, it is determined to execute the reach performance designated by the variation pattern.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the start timing of the effect determined to be executed (10SHS6). Specifically, the production control CPU120 sets the timer value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to this fluctuation pattern as an initial value to the production control process timer, and the type and mode of production determined to be executed. is stored in a timer value storage area of RAM 122 in association with performance specific data specifying performance and an execution timing specification timer value indicating the performance execution timing by comparison with the timer value of the performance control process timer. When there are a plurality of effects determined to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect specifying data and the execution timing specific timer value in the timer value storage area for each effect.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 supplies the display control unit 123 with an instruction to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols for deriving the mode specified by the current variation pattern and the determined final stop symbol (10SHS7). The display control unit 123 receives the instruction and starts variable display of the decoration pattern. At this time, the display corresponding to the variable display may be updated.

Thereafter, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "2" (step 10SHS8), the variable display start setting process is terminated.

(Execution timing and production period of vibration production and gaze guidance production)
FIG. 12-5 is a diagram showing an example of execution timings and presentation periods of the vibration presentation and the line-of-sight guidance presentation. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at either the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started or the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established. In addition, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at one of the timing T3 during execution of the normal reach effect and the timing T4 during execution of the super reach effect. It is possible.

In addition, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at one of the timing T3 during execution of the normal reach effect and the timing T4 during execution of the super reach effect. In that case, it is possible to execute the visual guidance effect before that.

Effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment starts the line of sight guidance effect 4 seconds before timing T3 when executing the line of sight guidance effect before executing the vibration effect at timing T3 during execution of the reach effect of normal reach. , the vibration performance is started when the timing T3 comes. Similarly, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the line-of-sight guidance effect before executing the vibrating effect at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach, four seconds before the timing T4. Performance is started, and vibration performance is started when timing T4 comes. The production period of the line-of-sight guidance production in this embodiment is 5 seconds. Therefore, the vibration effect is executed for the first second while the visual guidance effect is being executed.

According to such a configuration, since the sense of unity between the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect is generated, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

(Example of production operation)
FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. In this production operation example, an example of executing the vibration production at timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win production of super reach will be described.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a plurality of types of reach effect of super reach. The effect control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the type of super reach in the reach effect of super reach. In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-6(A), a background image 10SHY of "mountain scenery" is displayed as the background image corresponding to the type of super reach.

In addition, when the ready-to-win effect of super-ready-to-win is started, the effect control CPU 120 reduces and displays the decoration pattern that was stop-displayed when the ready-to-win was established. In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-6(A), the "left" ready-to-win decorative pattern 10SH5L is obtained by reducing the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L when the ready-to-win is established. , and a "right" ready-to-win decorative pattern 10SH5R that is reduced from the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative design display area 5R when the ready-to-win is established.

A small pattern display area 10SHK smaller than the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is provided at the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, variable display of small patterns is performed in synchronization with variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns. The effect image showing the small pattern is also called a notification information image. Therefore, in the small symbol display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect image showing the small symbol as the notification information image is variably displayed, and the effect image showing the confirmed small symbol as the display result is displayed. derived.

In this manner, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of a small pattern different from the decoration pattern is performed. During the period from the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern to the derivation of the fixed decoration pattern as the display result, the variable display of the small pattern is continuously performed in a fixed display mode, and the small pattern disappears from the screen or is obstructed. It is not shielded by Therefore, the small symbol display area 10SHK is configured to be always visible, and the player can always visually recognize the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display area 10SHK. The small patterns that are variably displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK are also called constant small patterns or small patterns for performance. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, for example, in a display mode that is partially or wholly common to each of a plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as a pattern that indicates numbers in the same manner as the part that indicates numbers in the decorative pattern, a plurality of identifiable An effect image showing the type of small symbol may be variably displayed as the notification information image. It should be noted that the small symbols may be displayed only when the decorative symbols are not displayed. For example, after the variable display of the decoration pattern is displayed in the reach mode, instead of the variable display of the decoration pattern, the variable display of the small pattern is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. may be displayed in the lower left corner of the

In addition, a special pattern, a decorative pattern, and a fourth pattern next to the normal pattern are provided, and the variable display of the fourth pattern may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special pattern and the decorative pattern. The variable display of the fourth pattern is, for example, in a fourth pattern display area provided on or outside the screen of the image display device 5, and repeats display and non-display in a specific display color at regular time intervals. This is achieved by continuing display control. However, the display result of the variable display of the small symbols may be displayed in a manner that the player can easily recognize when compared with the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol.

Further, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are, for example, as shown in FIG. are placed at a distance. Therefore, the player who pays attention to the effect by the display on the image display device 5 becomes difficult to confirm the display state of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the variable display of the special symbols progresses. It may be difficult to recognize whether it is in progress or whether the display result has been derived. On the other hand, small patterns are variably displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5, and by deriving the display result, it is possible to determine whether the variable display is in progress, Whether or not the display result is derived can be displayed in a manner that the player can easily recognize.

In this example, a suspended display area 10SHH for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended, and an active display area 10SHA for displaying active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. , is displayed. Incidentally, when the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is being executed, the reservation display area 10SHH and the active display area 10SHA may not be displayed.

A pending number display area 10SHHS is provided at the left corner of the screen of the image display device 5 . In the reserved number display area 10SHHS, similarly to the reserved display area 10SHH, the reserved number of variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the special game is displayed so as to be identifiable. The display mode is a mode displayed in Arabic numerals.

Then, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the line-of-sight guidance effect four seconds before the timing T4 during execution of the reach effect of super reach. The effect control CPU 120 executes, as the line-of-sight guidance effect, an effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the push button 31B using a visual effect, for example.

In this example, the effect control CPU 120 first displays a character image 10SHC imitating a character holding a hammer and a button image 10SHB imitating the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 12-6(B). do.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 changes the aspect of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings up the hammer as shown in FIGS. 12-6(B) to 12-(D). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R, as shown in FIGS. Light so that the light spot moves from the inside to the outside.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 changes the character image 10SHC so that the character swings down the hammer as shown in FIGS. 12-7(E) and (F). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R in accordance with the action of the character swinging down the hammer, as shown in FIGS. Light so that the light spot moves from the outside to the inside.

After that, as shown in FIG. 12-7(G), the effect control CPU 120 causes the hammer swung down by the character to hit the button image 10SHB at the timing T4, and the button image 10SHB to simulate a plurality of stars. The various images are changed so that the "star" effect image 10SHS is scattered. In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (G), the production control CPU 120 starts the vibration production at the timing T4, vibrates the push button 31B, and is built in the push button 31B. The game effect lamp 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned on.

Then, one second after the timing T4, the effect control CPU 120 ends the line-of-sight guidance effect, as shown in FIG. 12-7(H). After that, when the vibration time of the push button 31B by the vibration effect has passed, the effect control CPU 120 ends the vibration effect, stops the vibration of the push button 31B, and the game effect lamp built in the push button 31B. 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned off.

Here, the push button 31B is provided at a position away from the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, below the game area of the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIG. 12-1. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a player who pays attention to the display effect on the image display device 5 to check the state of the push button 31B. It can be difficult to recognize whether On the other hand, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect on the screen of the image display device 5 before the vibration effect is executed, it is possible to make the user pay attention to the push button 31B before the push button 31B vibrates. The vibration of the button 31B can be favorably recognized, and the interest of the vibration presentation can be sufficiently enhanced.

In addition, the priority of the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect is always set lower than the small pattern and the display of the number of reservations. This priority setting can be realized by displaying a line-of-sight guidance effect in a layer on the back side of the layer that always displays the small symbols and the display of the number of reservations among the plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-7(G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is always displayed on the back side of the small pattern displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of , always has a lower priority than the small pattern.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (G), the effect image 10SHS of the "star" is displayed on the back side of the number of reservations displayed in the number of reservations display area 10SHHS, and the line of sight It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of the induction effect, has a lower priority than the display of the pending number.

On the other hand, the priority of the visual guidance effect display is set higher than the pending display, the active display, the background image, and the decoration pattern. This priority setting can be realized by displaying a line-of-sight guidance effect in a layer on the front side of the layer that displays the background image and the decorative pattern among the plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 12-6(B) to 12-7(G), the character image 10SHC and the button image 10SHB are displayed in front of the background image 10SHY of "mountain scenery". It can be said that the character image 10SHC and the button image 10SHB, which are displays for the visual guidance effect, have a higher priority than the background image 10SHY of the "mountain scenery".

In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-6(D), the hammer of the character image 10SHC is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R. It can be said that the character image 10SHC, which is the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect, has a higher priority than the "left" ready-to-win decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" ready-to-win decoration pattern 10SH5R.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 12-6(D), a "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R. Therefore, it can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect, has a higher priority than the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 12-6(G), a "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed on the front side of the suspension display displayed in the suspension display area 10SHH, and the line of sight guidance effect It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of , has a higher priority than the reserved display.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 12-6(G), the effect image 10SHS of "star" is displayed in front of the active display displayed in the active display area 10SHA, and the visual guidance effect is displayed. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of , has a higher priority than the active display.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect can be made conspicuous while always ensuring the visibility of the small pattern and the display of the number of reservations.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIGS. Also, the high-priority small patterns and the display of the pending numbers are displayed brightly, and the other displays are displayed darkly.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect can be made more conspicuous while always ensuring the visibility of the small pattern and the display of the number of reservations more preferably. .

(Modified example of characteristic portion 10SH)
The invention relating to the characteristic portion 10SH is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the invention.

For example, in the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4 in FIG. 12-3, the determination ratio of presence/absence of visual guidance effect may be set according to which mode of vibration effect is to be executed. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the current vibration effect is a vibrating effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, or the push button 31B is held for 3 seconds. Depending on whether the vibration effect is a mode in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, or the vibration effect is a mode in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors. The presence or absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect may be determined at different ratios. Here, when the vibrating effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, it is easy to execute the visual guidance effect. Also, when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit light in rainbow colors is executed, the visual guidance effect is always executed. In other words, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the execution ratio of the vibration effect with a higher jackpot reliability is higher than when it is not executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the execution of the vibration effect with the higher reliability of the big win by executing the visual guidance effect.

The effect control CPU 120 may be configured to be able to execute a vibration effect interlocking with the advance notice effect. In this case, as the vibration effect interlocked with the notice effect, a plurality of types are available according to the combination of the interlocking notice effect, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, and the emission color of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect. may be executable. The effect control CPU 120 can execute a character product announcement effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display being executed, depending on the operation mode of the movable body 32 . Then, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect interlocking with the highly reliable character object announcement effect. This vibration effect is a effect of vibrating the push button 31B in synchronism with the movement of the movable body 32 and causing the push button 31B to emit white light. Incidentally, in this case, the reliability of the big hit of the vibration production should be higher than the reliability of the big win of the interlocking character product announcement production. According to such a configuration, the vibration effect can be used as a chance-up effect in the character object announcement effect.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect interlocking with another highly reliable advance notice effect. This vibration effect is a effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated in synchronization with the image displayed in the advance notice effect, and the push button 31B emits white light. In this case, the reliability of the vibration performance should be higher than the reliability of the announcement performance to be linked. According to such a configuration, the vibration effect can be a chance-up effect in the advance notice effect.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, after the finalized decoration pattern that becomes the jackpot combination is derived, the game balls pass through a specific area provided in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a specific passage gate or winning opening. By doing so, a big hit game state may be started. In that case, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a round lottery effect for notifying the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state when a game ball passing through a specific area is detected. The effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect interlocking with the round lottery effect. This vibration performance is a mode of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and lighting the push button 31B in white when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery performance, and is executed in the jackpot game state. It notifies that the upper limit number of rounds to be played is not the minimum number of rounds among the multiple options. Alternatively, as the vibration performance, when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery performance, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors to achieve a big hit. The upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the game state may be definitely notified that the number of rounds is the highest among the plurality of options. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the vibration effect linked with the round lottery effect.

The effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing error notification processing. In the error notification process, when an error command notifying the occurrence of an error is received from the main board 11 or when an error is detected in the performance control board 12, error notification corresponding to the error is executed. In the error notification process, when an error is detected, a process of displaying an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5 and a process of outputting an error notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed. The effect control CPU 120 can display an error notification image corresponding to an error on the image display device 5 while executing the line-of-sight guidance effect. In that case, the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect should have a lower priority than the display of the error notification image. According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably ensure the visibility of the error notification image even when the visual guidance effect is being executed when the error notification image is displayed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different between when the visual guidance effect is executed and when the visual guidance effect is not executed. For example, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is longer than when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed and the vibration effect is executed. You can improve your interest when you play. Further, for example, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to be longer than when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, even if the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed. , it is easy for the user to recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance may be different between the timing before the reference timing and the timing after the reference timing with reference to a certain timing. For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to 1.5 seconds at the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, which is the timing before the timing T2, based on the timing T2 at which the ready-to-win state is established. , 3 seconds at timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win production of normal reach, which is the timing after timing T2, and timing T4 during execution of ready-to-win production of super ready-to-win, which is the timing after timing T2. The vibration time at the timing after the reference timing should be longer than the vibration time at the timing before the timing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the vibration presentation is executed after the reference timing.

Depending on the strength of the vibration of the push button 31B, the reliability of the big hit of the vibration presentation may differ. For example, there are times when the push button 31B is vibrated with a first strength and when it is vibrated with a second strength that is greater than the first strength, and the push button 31B is vibrated with the second strength. When the push button 31B is vibrated with the first strength, the reliability of the big hit of the vibration presentation should be made higher than that when vibrating the push button 31B with the first strength. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the intensity of vibration when the push button 31B vibrates.

The execution pattern of the vibration performance and the reliability of the big win may be common between the pachinko game machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko game machine 1 of the second model different from the first model. According to such a configuration, in the first model pachinko game machine 1 and the second model pachinko game machine 1, it is possible to eliminate variations in the execution pattern of the vibration performance and the reliability of the big win. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling discomfort.

A vibrating effect may be executed as a pre-reading foretelling effect for foretelling the reliability of the big hit in the variable display before execution. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the vibration effect.

In addition to this, when the vibration effect is executed as the pre-reading notice effect, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the pre-reading notice effect is the first mode and the second mode. , the reliability of the big hit in the variable display before execution, which is the target of the pre-reading notice, may be different. For example, when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the anticipatory notice effect is a mode in which the vibration continues for a predetermined period of time, and a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined period of time, Reliability levels of big wins are made different in variable display before execution to be the target of pre-reading notice. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the vibration effect as the pre-reading preview effect.

Alternatively, when the vibration effect is executed as the pre-reading notice effect, the execution timing of the vibration effect as the pre-reading notice effect is a plurality of vibrating effects as the notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display being executed. may be executed only at one of the timings of . For example, the vibration effect as the pre-reading notice effect can be executed only at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. According to such a configuration, when the vibration performance is executed at a timing different from the timing at which the vibration performance as the foreseeing notice can be executed, the vibration performance is the foretelling performance for foretelling the reliability of the big hit in the variable display being executed. has been executed.

At the timing at which the vibration performance as the advance notice effect which gives notice of the reliability of the big hit in the variable display during execution can be executed, when the vibration effect is executed as the foreseeing notice effect, the reliability of the big win in the variable display under execution is announced. The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the advance notice effect may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the anticipation effect. For example, when it is possible to execute a vibration effect as a pre-reading notice effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the push button 31B in the vibration effect as a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display being executed. is 3 seconds, and the vibration time of the push button 31B is 1.5 seconds in the vibration effect as the pre-reading notice effect. Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as the notice performance for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display during execution is set to vibrate continuously for a predetermined time, and the push button 31B in the vibration performance as the look-ahead notice performance. The vibration mode of is a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined period of time. According to such a configuration, at the timing at which the vibration production as the advance notice production for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display being executed can be executed, when the vibration production as the foreseeing advance notice production can be executed, any It is possible to easily recognize whether or not the vibration presentation has been executed.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model different from the first model share the execution pattern of the vibration performance and the reliability of the big win, the performance is executed at a specific timing. Regarding the vibration performance, even if the mode of the vibration performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 of the first model and the mode of the vibration performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 of the second model are different, the jackpot is won. The reliability may be common. For example, regarding the vibration effect executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the light emission mode of the push button 31B in the specific effect executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model Even if the light emitting mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance to be executed is different, the reliability of the big win is 100%. According to such a configuration, even if the model of the pachinko game machine 1 is different, it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation for the execution of the vibration performance at the specific timing.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be adjusted so as to match the image of the effect executed at that time, for example, when the visual guidance effect is not executed. For example, in the case of executing a notification effect for notifying that a ready-to-win situation has been established at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win situation is established, the vibrating effect is performed by vibrating the push button 31B during the period when the image of the notification effect is displayed. According to such a configuration, even when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the effect being executed at that time is generated, so the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

When the pachinko game machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko game machine 1 of the second model different from the first model share the execution pattern of the vibration presentation and the reliability of the big win, the vibration of the same execution pattern. As for the effect, only the lower limit of the reliability of the big win may be guaranteed. According to such a configuration, for example, when the vibration performance is executed as a chance-up performance of another performance, the reliability of the big hit of the vibration performance can be flexibly set in relation to the reliability of the big win of the other performance. While adjusting, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

The vibration effect may be executed at timings different from the timings T1 to T4. For example, the CPU 120 for performance control temporarily stops and displays the decorative symbols of a predetermined ready-to-win combination which is not a big-win combination after the variable display mode of the decorative symbols becomes the ready-to-win mode, and then the reliability of the big win is higher than that of the ready-to-win mode. It is possible to execute an incendiary effect to incite the development to the reach mode. After the fanning performance is executed, there are a case where the ready-to-win state with high reliability of big win is developed and a case where the display result becomes "lost" without developing into a ready-to-win state with high reliability of big win. In the case of developing into a ready-to-win mode with high reliability of big win, the CPU 120 for performance control executes a success performance for informing that the ready-to-win mode with high reliability of big win is developed as a result of the performance of the performance of inciting performance. On the other hand, when the display result becomes ``lost'' without developing into a ready-to-win state with high reliability of big win, the performance control CPU 120 notifies that the ready-to-reach state with high reliability of big win is not developed as a result of the performance of the fanning performance. Execute the instigation failure performance. In executing such a fanning effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect at the timing of executing the fanning success effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when the inciting success effect is executed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibrating effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the successful fanning effect may be adjusted so as to match the image of the successful fanning effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest when the inciting success effect is executed.

The luminescent color of the push button 31B in the vibration performance executable at the timing of executing the fanning success performance is the vibration of the execution pattern with the lowest jackpot reliability among the vibration performances of a plurality of types of execution patterns executable at other timings. The push button 31B in the presentation may have the same luminous color as the luminous color. According to such a configuration, when the inciting success effect is executed, there is a possibility that the display result will be "lost" even if it develops into a ready-to-win mode with high reliability of the big win, but the reliability of the big win is excessively increased. You can prevent it from rising.

In addition, when the display result is a "big hit", the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at the timing immediately before stopping and displaying the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern. According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to improve the amusement at the timing immediately before the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, but also to heighten expectations for the vibration performance itself, and to perform the vibration performance at other timings as well. You can improve your interest when you play.

When the pachinko game machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko game machine 1 of the second model different from the first model share the execution pattern of the vibration performance and the reliability of the big win, the advantage to the player is obtained. Even in the case of a "jackpot" of a jackpot type different from the jackpot type with the highest degree of advantage among a plurality of types of different jackpot types, the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect can be "rainbow color". do. According to such a configuration, when the luminescent color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect becomes "rainbow color", it is possible to avoid misunderstanding that it is a "jackpot" of the jackpot type with the highest degree of advantage. can be

If there are only two types of advantages for the player depending on the type of jackpot, the execution pattern in which the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is "rainbow" may not be provided. According to such a configuration, even though the push button 31B emits light in the "rainbow color" in the vibration effect, it is possible to prevent the "big win" of the big win type having a low advantage for the player. It is possible to prevent the expectation of the vibration performance from being spoiled.

The performance control CPU 120 may guide the player's line of sight to the push button 31B using an auditory performance effect as the visual direction guidance performance. For example, the production control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound effect when the vibration production is being executed, and then gradually increases the volume of the specific sound effect from a small volume to a large volume as the visual guidance production. Output to change. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player who has difficulty in recognizing the line-of-sight guidance performance using the visual performance effect pay attention to the operation means before the operation means vibrates.

When the winning probability of the big win is changed according to the set value, the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value can be used even in the same execution pattern of the vibration performance. The reliability of the big hit of the vibration performance of the execution pattern may differ from one time to another. For example, even in the vibration performance of the same execution pattern, when the set value is "6", the reliability of the big hit of the vibration performance of the execution pattern should be higher than when the set value is "1". . According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed and the display result is a "big hit", it is possible to increase the expectation that the set value is highly advantageous.

When the winning probability of the big win is changed according to the set value, the push button 31B in the vibration performance is changed between the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value. may differ in vibration time and emission color. According to such a configuration, the set value can be suggested by the vibration effect. For example, when the set value is one of "1" to "3" and when the set value is one of "4" to "6", the push button 31B in the vibration effect It suffices if the vibration time and the emission color are different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not the high setting, which may be the set value "6", which is the most advantageous for the player, is set by the vibration effect. Further, for example, the vibration time and the light emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration presentation may be different between when the set value is an odd number and when the set value is an even number. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not it is an even set value that may be the set value "6", which is the most advantageous set value for the player, by the vibration effect.

At the timing T2 when the reach is established, the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. It may be possible to execute a vibration effect in which the light is emitted. According to such a configuration, even at the timing T2 at which the ready-to-win state is established, attention can be paid not only to the execution of the vibration presentation, but also to the mode when the vibration presentation is performed.

At the timing T2 when the reach is established, the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. In the case where it is possible to execute the vibration effect in which the light is emitted, the vibration effect is executed at both the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established. There may be In this case, even if the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit rainbow colors is not executed at either timing T1 or timing T2, the vibration at the timing T1 is performed. A specific combination of the execution pattern of the performance and the execution pattern of the vibration performance at the timing T2 may deterministically notify that the display result will be a "big hit". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors. Even if the vibration performance is not executed, it is possible not only to heighten the expectation for the execution of the vibration performance at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win is established, but also to increase the attention to the mode of the vibration performance at the timing T2. .

The vibration effect may be executed at either timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of normal reach and timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. In that case, even if the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit rainbow colors is not executed at either timing T3 or timing T4, the vibration at the timing T3 is performed. A specific combination of the execution pattern of the performance and the execution pattern of the vibration performance at the timing T4 may deterministically notify that the display result will be a "big hit". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 during execution of the normal reach effect, the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is vibrated in rainbow colors. Even if the performance is not executed, not only can the sense of expectation for the execution of the vibration performance at the timing T4 during the execution of the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win be enhanced, but also the mode of the vibration performance at the timing T4 can be more focused. can be enhanced.

The vibration duration and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the mode of vibration performance for deterministically informing that the display result will be a "big hit" are the vibration performances in a mode that do not deterministically inform that the display result will be a "big hit". The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in 1 may be different. For example, the vibration duration of the push button 31B in the mode of vibrating the display result of a "big win" is changed to the vibration time of the vibration mode of the mode not informing the display result of the "big hit". The vibration time is set to be longer than the vibration time of the push button 31B. Alternatively, while the vibration mode of the push button 31B is monotonous in the mode of vibration performance that does not deterministically notify that the display result will be a "big hit", it definitely reports that the display result will be a "big hit". In the vibration effect of the mode, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with a predetermined beat. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the vibration effect in the form of deterministically informing that the display result will be a "big hit" is a special vibration effect.

When the vibrating effect is executed at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-reach effect of normal reach or the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-reach effect of super ready-to-win, the line-of-sight guidance effect may be executed without fail. According to such a configuration, the expectation that the display result will be a "big hit" due to the execution of the ready-to-win effect is favorably increased by favorably recognizing the vibration of the operating means. be able to.

A timing T3 during execution of a ready-to-win performance of a normal ready-to-win when a vibrating performance is to be executed at one of the timing T1 at which the variable display of decorative patterns is started and the timing T2 at which the ready-to-win is established; The vibrating effect may be executed at either timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach. In that case, the vibration duration and luminescence color of the push button 31B in the vibration presentation performed at the timing T3 and the timing T4 are lower than the vibration duration and luminescence color of the push button 31B in the vibration presentation performed at the timing T1 and the timing T2. In other words, the timing T3 is such that the reliability of the vibration performance performed at the timing T3 or the timing T4 does not fall below the reliability of the vibration performance performed at the timing T1 or the timing T2. Alternatively, the execution pattern of the vibrating effect that can be executed at the timing T4 may be restricted. For example, when the vibration effect of execution pattern SE2 is executed at timing T1, the vibration effect of execution pattern SE5 is executed at time T3, the vibration effect of execution pattern SE8 is executed at time T4, limit. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the credibility of the big win reliability from being lowered when the vibration effect is executed a plurality of times in one variable display.

When the vibration performance interlocking with the foretelling performance is executable, the mode of the vibration performance interlocking with the foretelling performance and the mode of the vibration performance not interlocking with the foretelling performance may be different. For example, in the vibration effect interlocking with the advance notice effect, the push button 31B is vibrated in time with the music played in the interlocking advance notice effect. Further, for example, in the vibration effect linked to the character object announcement effect, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with the sound effect when the character object moves. Further, for example, in the vibration effect interlocked with the advance notice effect, the push button 31B is caused to emit light in a color different from the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect not interlocked with the advance notice effect. According to such a configuration, when the vibration performance is executed, it is possible to make it easy to recognize whether the vibration performance is linked with the advance notice performance or not linked with the notice performance. .

A present box presentation may be made executable. In that case, when the present box is opened, a character holding a hammer may pop out from the opened present box as shown in FIG. According to such a configuration, it is possible to heighten expectations for execution of the visual guidance effect and the vibration effect due to the execution of the present box effect.

When it is possible to execute an operation effect for operating the push button 31B, in this operation effect, in order to notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid during the operation valid period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid, The push button 31B may be illuminated. In that case, the push button 31B is lit in a mode different from the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect. For example, when the push button 31B is lit in the vibration effect, the lighting mode for the vibration effect may be controlled so that the push button 31B emits red light continuously for three seconds during which the push button 31B is vibrated. . On the other hand, when the push button 31B is lit in the operation presentation, the button operation switches the push button 31B between red light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (light off) every 150 milliseconds during the operation effective period. You may control so that it may become the lighting mode for a suggestion. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid. It should be noted that the operation lever of the stick controller 31A may be illuminated in order to notify that the operation of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A is valid during the lever operation valid period in which the operation of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A is valid. In this case, control may be performed so that the operation lever of the stick controller 31A emits light during the lever operation valid period, so that the lighting mode for suggesting lever operation is obtained. The lighting mode for suggesting lever operation may be the same lighting mode as the lighting mode for suggesting button operation, or may be a lighting mode different from the lighting mode for suggesting button operation.

For example, when the special game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B or the like is operated by the player to set the volume of the effect to be executed, the type of music or background to be output, and the image display. Settings related to effects, such as brightness settings of the device 5 and brightness settings of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9, may be changeable. It should be noted that, for example, it may be possible to select which effect setting is to be changed from the menu screen, or a different operation is performed corresponding to the change item desired by the player, and the setting corresponding to the operation is changed. You may do so. Further, when the special game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B may be lighted in order to notify that the setting regarding the effect can be changed. In that case, the push button 31B is lit in a mode different from the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the vibration presentation and the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the operation presentation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify that the setting regarding the effect can be changed.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 10SH)
In relation to the characteristic portion 10SH, there has been proposed a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player and that can execute a vibration effect in which an operation means that the player can operate vibrates (for example, Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2019-051075).

In general, a player plays a game while looking at display means on which variable displays and various effects are displayed. Therefore, when the operation means is out of sight of the player, there is a possibility that the player cannot recognize that the operation means is vibrating even if the vibration effect is executed. In that case, it is not possible to sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration presentation.

Therefore, in order to make the game means pay attention before the vibration effect is executed and to sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect, the game machine of the means 1 related to the characteristic part 10SH is a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player. A machine (for example, the pachinko machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player), an operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, the pachinko machine 1 can be controlled by the player is provided with a push button 31B capable of performing a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation, etc.), and a vibration effect execution means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates is capable of executing a vibration effect in which the player vibrates, etc.), and a line-of-sight guidance effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the operation means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is the player's (e.g., it is possible to execute a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the line of sight to the push button 31B), and the advantageous state is controlled when the vibration effect is executed rather than when the vibration effect is not executed. (For example, the pachinko game machine 1 has a higher jackpot reliability when the vibration performance is executed than when the vibration performance is not executed), and the vibration performance executing means , at the first timing and at the second timing after the first timing, the vibration effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the variable display of the decoration pattern at the timing T1 and the second timing after the first timing). , a timing T2 at which the reach is established, a timing T3 after the timings T1 and T2, during which the ready-to-win performance of the normal reach is being executed, and a timing during the execution of the ready-to-reach performance of the super ready-to-win. (e.g., at any one of T4 and T4, the vibration effect can be executed), regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, the vibration effect is performed in a common manner. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 is either timing T1 or T2, or either timing T3 or T4, regardless of , the vibrating effect can be executed in a manner in which the vibration time and the light emitting color of the push button 31B are common, etc.), the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the first timing ( For example, production control CPU 120 can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing (e.g., not executing the line-of-sight guidance effect at timing T1 and timing T2) (for example, for effect control The CPU 120 is characterized by being able to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 and the timing T4.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the operation means before the vibration effect is executed, and to sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect.

The game machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 10SH is the game machine of the means 1, wherein the vibration effect execution means can execute the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed (for example, effect control For example, the CPU 120 may be capable of executing the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed.

According to such a configuration, since a sense of unity is generated between the vibration presentation and the line-of-sight guidance presentation, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

The game machine of means 3 related to the characteristic part 10SH is a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect different from the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect in the game machine of the means 1 or 2 (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , being able to execute a reach effect of super reach, etc.), and the vibration effect executing means is capable of executing the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , the vibrating effect can be executed when the reach effect of super reach is being executed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the vibration effect may be executed while the specific effect is being executed, the interest can be improved.

The game machine of means 4 relating to the characteristic part 10SH is a display means for displaying in any of the game machines of means 1 to 3 (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 has an image display device 5 that displays various effect images. and the like), and the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect has a lower priority than the display of the predetermined information and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information (for example, the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect image has lower priority than constant small patterns, pending number display, and various error notifications, and has higher priority than pending display, active display, background image, decorative pattern, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect stand out while suitably ensuring the visibility of the predetermined information when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed.

The game machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic part 10SH is the game machine of any one of the means 1 to 4, wherein the vibration performance execution means is the vibration performance of the first mode and the advantageous state more than the first mode. (For example, the production control CPU 120 vibrates the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and vibrates the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds. and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. When the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit red light is executed than when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B and causing the push button 31B to emit white light is executed. ), when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the vibration effect of the second mode is more likely to be executed than the vibration effect of the first mode (for example, pachinko game In the machine 1, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds rather than vibrating the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and lighting the push button 31B in white. At the same time, the vibration effect of making the push button 31B emit red light is easier to execute, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the execution of the vibration effect of the second mode by executing the visual guidance effect.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portion 10SH may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to another characteristic portion. Features that are combined in this way or individual features that are not combined may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to other features.

(Description of characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK)
FIG. 13-1 shows a configuration example of a rendering device relating to characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK. In this configuration example, a movable body 32 for presentation serving as a movable presentation device is provided in front of the lower end, which is the lower edge on the front side overlapping the display screen of the image display device 5 . The movable body 32 may be connected to an operation motor via a link mechanism, for example. The movable body 32 can be changed between an initial position and a position different from the initial position on the front side of the image display device 5 by transmitting power from the operation motor. The movable body 32 may be one whose position can be changed by power from, for example, an operating solenoid or other general actuator.

The movable body 32 has a frame and a window. The frame portion of the movable body 32 is configured using a decorative member, and has a configuration that can be covered so that the display screen of the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by the player. The window portion of the movable body 32 is made of transparent glass or synthetic resin, or formed as a simple opening, and has a see-through structure so that the player can visually recognize the display screen of the image display device 5. ing.

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs forming the upper frame lamp 9C, a plurality of LEDs forming the left frame lamp 9M, and a plurality of LEDs forming the right frame lamp 9N. The upper frame lamp 9C is provided at a predetermined position above the game area in the gaming machine frame 3 . The left frame lamp 9M is provided at a predetermined position on the left side of the game area in the gaming machine frame 3 . The right frame lamp 9N is provided at a predetermined position on the right side of the game area in the gaming machine frame 3 .

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs forming the lever lamp 9B1 and a plurality of LEDs forming the button lamp 9B2. The lever lamp 9B1 is composed of a plurality of LEDs incorporated in the operating rod (operating lever) of the stick controller 31A. The button lamp 9B2 is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided inside the push button 31B. Part or all of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be formed of a translucent member. As a result, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A can be illuminated by lighting the lever lamp 9B1. Also, the push button 31B can be illuminated by turning on the button lamp 9B2.

For example, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are integrally formed, and by driving the vibration motor 131, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can vibrate. The vibration motor 131 may be provided inside or near the push button 31B, may be built in the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, or may be provided at the base position of the operation lever. A plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided in order to diversify the vibration mode of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B.

In the pachinko game machine 1, as a suggestive performance suggesting that the variable display result becomes "big hit" at a predetermined rate and controlled to a big win game state, an operation part performance including a light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance can be executed. In the vibration effect included in the operation part effect, by driving the vibration motor 131, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate in a vibration mode according to the vibration pattern. In the light emission effect included in the operation part effect, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit light along with the vibration effect by lighting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. In the light emitting effect included in the operation part effect, lighting of one of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 causes one of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to emit light along with the vibration effect. good too. For example, by turning on only the button lamp 9B2, only the push button 31B may emit light along with the vibration effect.

FIG. 13-2(A) shows a setting example of an operation part effect pattern used for executing an operation part effect. In this setting example, operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03, AKC11 to ACK13, AKC21, AKC22, AKC31, AKC32, and AKC41 are prepared in advance as a plurality of operation unit effect patterns. Emission color, vibration pattern, jackpot reliability, and application are set for each operation part production pattern. The light emission color corresponding to the operation part effect pattern indicates the light emission mode when the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are caused to emit light in the light emission effect included in the operation part effect. A vibration pattern corresponding to the operation part effect pattern indicates a vibration mode when the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate in the vibration effect included in the operation part effect. The big win reliability corresponding to the operation part performance pattern indicates the rate of control to the big win game state with the variable display result becoming "big win" when the operation part performance corresponding to the operation part performance pattern is executed. The application corresponding to the operation part effect pattern indicates the timing at which the operation part effect is executed for each operation part effect pattern.

The operation part effect can be executed at a plurality of timings associated with the progress of the variable display, such as, for example, when the pre-variation starts, when the target variation starts, when the reach is established, when the reach develops, and when the winner is announced. The preliminary change start time is the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is executed before the variable display that is the target of the suggestion by the operation unit effect. The target variation start time is the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is the target of the suggestion by the operation unit presentation. When the ready-to-win state is established, the timing corresponds to the case where the variable display is in the ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win development time is a timing corresponding to the case where the developing effect is executed along with the ready-to-reach effect of the super reach. The development effect is a effect for notifying that the ready-to-reach effect of super reach is executed after the ready-to-reach effect of normal reach is executed (development of reach). The timing of winning/failure notification incitement corresponds to the timing corresponding to the winning/failure notification performance before the success/failure notification performance for informing whether or not the variable display result becomes a ``jackpot'' during execution of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win.

In the setting example shown in FIG. 13-2(A), a plurality of operating part effect patterns that can be used for executing operating part effects corresponding to a plurality of timings are prepared in advance. Further, it is set so that different operation part effect patterns can be used according to a plurality of timings at which operation part effects can be executed.

When the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is executed, the reliability of big win is higher than when only the ready-to-win performance of normal ready-to-win is executed and the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is not executed. Depending on whether or not the ready-to-win performance of super-reach is executed to derive the determined decoration pattern of the big-hit combination, it is possible to inform whether or not to be controlled to the big-hit game state. As for the reach performance of the super reach, a plurality of reach performances including, for example, the SP reach A may be prepared in advance. Each ready-to-win effect may include effects having different effects from each other. Each ready-to-win effect may include effects having a common effect mode. The decision ratio when the variable display result is "jackpot" and the decision ratio when the variable display result is not "jackpot" are set so that the reliability of the jackpot depends on each reach production. Just do it. Using a random value for determining the variation pattern, depending on the variation pattern determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table, presence or absence of reach production, presence or absence of reach production of super reach, production mode in reach production, etc. It would be nice if it could be set.

Regardless of specific effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game including the variable display, such as the ready-to-win effect, the operation part effect is executed at a predetermined rate depending on whether the variable display result is a "big hit" or not. It is possible to determine the presence or absence of An operation part effect that can be executed regardless of such a specific effect is also called a single operation part effect. On the other hand, there is a case where an effect is executed in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated or vibrated in association with the specific effect. The production by light emission or vibration associated with such a specific production is also called a specific interlocking production.

FIG. 13-2(B) shows a setting example when executing a specific interlocking effect. In this setting example, when executing a specific interlocking effect with a plurality of specific effects such as movable body operation, image display, music playback in the reach effect of SP reach A, or jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 Emission color and vibration pattern are set. The emission color in the specific interlocking effect is set according to the content of the specific effect, and it is sufficient that the control lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be made to emit light as part of the specific effect. The vibration pattern in the specific interlocking effect is set according to the content of the specific effect, and it is sufficient that the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be vibrated as part of the specific effect. Thus, since the specific interlocking performance can be executed as a part of the specific performance, the big win reliability is common to the specific performance, and the unique big win reliability is not set. The vibration of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the specific interlocking effect is included in the special vibration effect that can be executed along with execution of the specific effect. The operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the light emission of the push button 31B in the specific interlocking effect are included in the specific light emitting effect that can be executed along with the execution of the specific effect.

The reach performance of the SP reach A may be, for example, about 40% of the jackpot reliability. The jackpot type lottery CH1 may be a drawing effect that can be executed when the jackpot type is different from the first jackpot type with the minimum number of rounds (for example, 4 rounds). The jackpot type lottery CH2 may be a lottery effect that can be executed when the number of rounds is the second jackpot type with the maximum number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds). Incidentally, the jackpot type lotteries CH1 and CH2 may be a lottery performance related to the jackpot type according to the presence or absence of time reduction control and variable probability control after the jackpot game state is finished, and the end condition, or may be previously notified in the jackpot game state. A lottery effect relating to the presence or absence of a rank-up and the amount of increase in which the number of rounds is greater than the number of rounds may be used. As jackpot type lotteries CH1 and CH2, based on the game ball that has entered the V prize opening of the V prize attacker, when it is possible to control the probability variable state after the jackpot game state is over, whether or not the V prize attacker is opened and the opening time. , The number of times of opening, or depending on the termination conditions of the variable probability control, etc., it may be possible to execute a lottery effect related to the jackpot gaming state with different advantages. When it is possible to control from a small winning game state to a big winning game state based on the occurrence of V winning by the game ball entering the V winning attacker, whether or not the V winning attacker is opened, the opening time, the number of times of opening, or Depending on the number of rounds of the big win game state controlled after the occurrence of the V prize, it may be possible to execute a lottery effect related to the small win game state and the big win game state with different degrees of advantage.

Until the game state in which the V winning attacker can be released is started, control is performed in a weak vibration monitoring state, and after that, from the start of the game state in which the V winning attacker can be released, the V by entering the game ball into the V winning attacker. During the period until a prize is won, the strong vibration monitoring state may be set, and the control lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be controlled so as not to vibrate. Then, when a V prize is generated, control may be performed to the weak vibration monitoring state, and an effect including vibration of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be executed. The strong vibration monitoring state is a state in which vibration errors are easily detected, and the weak vibration monitoring state is a state in which it is more difficult to detect vibration errors than in the strong vibration monitoring state. During a period when there is a high possibility of fraud due to the generation of vibration by a player, control is performed to a strong vibration monitoring state. On the other hand, during a period in which there is little risk of cheating due to the player generating vibration, control is performed to the weak vibration monitoring state. When a vibration error is detected, the control of the production control CPU 120, etc., displays the warning image, outputs the warning sound, turns on the warning lamp, outputs the warning signal, or a combination of some or all of these, It is sufficient if the control for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality can be executed. When a vibration error is detected, the game control microcomputer 100 may control the CPU 103 of the pachinko game machine 1 to stop the game. As a result, it is possible to appropriately monitor the vibration and suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the notification of the vibration error or the game stop state due to the inappropriate abnormality determination.

FIG. 13-3 shows the setting contents of the vibration pattern. A plurality of vibration patterns are prepared in advance according to the vibration mode of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. FIG. 13-3(A) shows vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, AKV11, AKV12, AKV21, AKV22, and AKV31 used for executing vibration effects included in the operation part effects. FIG. 13-3(B) shows vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 used for executing the special vibration effect included in the specific interlocked effect.

The vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which the ON period and the OFF period are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01 that can be executed at the start of the preliminary fluctuation. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is not included in the operation part effect that can be executed at a timing different from the time of starting the preliminary fluctuation. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light becomes white along with the vibration effect.

The vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 1500 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation part effects by the operation part effect patterns AKC02 and AKC03 that can be executed at the start of the preliminary fluctuation. Also, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC11 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is not included in the operation part effects that can be executed at timings different from the start of the preliminary variation and the start of the target variation. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC02, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light along with the vibration effect becomes red. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC03, the light emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light along with the vibration effect becomes rainbow. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC11, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes white.

The vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 3000 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 is included in the operation part effects by the operation part effect patterns AKC12 and AKC13 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the operation part presentation by the vibration pattern AKV03 is not included in the operation part presentation that can be executed at a timing different from the target variation start time. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC12, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light along with the vibration effect becomes red. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC13, the light emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light along with the vibration effect becomes rainbow.

In the vibration pattern AKV11, it becomes a vibration mode of the ON period in accordance with the effect AKR1 when the ready-to-win state is established. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC21 that can be executed when the reach is established. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 is not included in the operation part effects that can be executed at a timing different from when the ready-to-win state is established. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC21, the light emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light along with the vibration effect becomes pink.

In the vibration pattern AKV12, it becomes a vibration mode of the ON period in accordance with the effect AKR2 when the ready-to-win state is established. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC22 that can be executed when the reach is established. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 is not included in the operation part effects that can be executed at a timing different from when the ready-to-win state is established. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC22, the emission color in the light emission effect of lighting the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B becomes orange along with the vibration effect.

As the vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the ready-to-win state is established, the vibration effect included in the operation part effect that can be executed at a timing different from the time when the ready-to-win state is established and the effect by a common vibration pattern may be executed. For example, as the vibration effect included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC21 executable when ready-to-win is established, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executable. Further, as the vibration effect included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC22 executable when ready-to-win is established, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 may be executable. In these cases, there is a case where the vibration mode of the vibration presentation is common between the operation section presentation executed when the ready-to-win state is established and the operation section presentation executed at the time of the start of the preliminary fluctuation or the start of the target fluctuation. . In this way, when the timings of executing the operation section effects are different, the vibration mode of the vibration effects is common, thereby preventing the control load of the effects and the control data from increasing.

In the vibration pattern AKV21, it becomes a vibration mode of the ON period according to the production AKS1 at the time of reach development. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC31 that can be executed at the time of reach development. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21 is not included in the operation part effect that can be executed at a timing different from the reach development time. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC31, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light becomes white along with the vibration effect.

In the vibration pattern AKV22, it becomes a vibration mode of the ON period in accordance with the production AKS2 at the time of reach development. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV22 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed when the reach develops. On the other hand, the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV22 is not included in the operation section presentation that can be executed at a timing different from the reach development time. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC32, the light emission color in the light emission effect in which the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light with the vibration effect becomes white.

As the vibration effect included in the operation part effect at the time of reach development, the vibration effect included in the operation part effect that can be executed at a timing different from that at the time of reach development and the effect with a common vibration pattern may be executed. For example, as the vibration effect included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC31 that can be executed when the reach develops, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executable. Further, as the vibration effect included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed at the time of reach development, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 may be executable. In these cases, there is a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation part effect executed when the reach develops and the operation part effect executed when the pre-variation starts or when the target change starts. . In this way, when the timings of executing the operation section effects are different, the vibration mode of the vibration effects is common, so that the control burden of the effects and the increase in the control data may be prevented.

The vibration pattern AKV31 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 1500 milliseconds or longer. For example, after the ON period continues for 1500 milliseconds, the ON period continues until the player's action that operates the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is detected in the effective detection period. I wish I could. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC41 that can be executed at the time of winning/failure notification. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is not included in the operation part effects that can be executed at a timing different from the time of the victory/failure notification. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC41, the luminescence color in the light emission effect in which the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light along with the vibration effect becomes gold.

It should be noted that whether or not to provide an effective detection period when the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is executed may be changed according to the type of effect to be executed with the variable display, such as the type of ready-to-win effect. good. When providing an effective detection period, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are switched between gold light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (lighting out) every 150 milliseconds so that the light emission mode is for suggesting operation. may be controlled. If the effective detection period is not provided, control may be performed so that the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is continuously illuminated in gold for a period of time during which the operation lever or the push button 31B is vibrated, so that the light emission mode for vibration effect is performed. On the other hand, when providing an effective detection period, it is suggested to switch the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B between emitting (lighting) and non-emitting (turning off) a red color different from gold every 150 milliseconds. You may control so that it may become the light emission mode for. By executing a light emission effect in a light emission mode that switches between light emission and non-light emission every 150 milliseconds, it is possible to confirm that the operation of operating the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is effective while executing the vibration effect. , can be suggested to the player. Alternatively, a plurality of lamp layers in which lamp control data can be set may be used to differentiate the priority of light emission control. For example, in the first lamp layer, as a lighting mode for suggesting normal operation, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are switched between red lighting (lighting) and non-lighting (lighting out) every 150 milliseconds. Set the lamp control data to In the second lamp layer, as a light emission mode for suggesting a special operation, lamp control data is set in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are continuously illuminated in gold for an effective detection period of 5000 milliseconds. do. Then, the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data set in the second lamp layer is performed rather than the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data set in the first lamp layer. Prioritize execution. As a result, the light emission mode for suggesting a special operation may be controlled so as to have a higher priority than the light emission mode for suggesting a normal operation.

A plurality of ready-to-win performances to be super ready-to-win may include a strong SP ready-to-win with a relatively high jackpot reliability and a weak SP ready-to-win with a relatively low big-hit reliability. In the ready-to-win effect of the strong SP reach, the hit/fail notification effect is executed after the action detection effect is executed by detecting the action of the player operating the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. When the vibration effect corresponding to the reach effect of such a strong SP reach is executed, it is turned on until the player's action to operate the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is detected during the effective detection period. It is sufficient if the vibration mode is such that the period continues. In the ready-to-win effect of the weak SP reach, the win/fail notification effect is executed without executing the motion detection effect. When the vibrating effect corresponding to the ready-to-reach effect of such a weak SP reach is executed, the vibrating mode according to the vibration pattern AKV31 may be set 1500 milliseconds or more before the win/fail notification effect. A case may be provided in which the vibration mode of the vibration presentation is different between the operating part presentation when the ready-to-reach presentation of the strong SP reach is executed and the operation presentation when the ready-to-reach presentation of the weak SP reach is executed. For example, as a vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are vibrated continuously for 5000 milliseconds, which is the effective detection period. You may control to the vibration mode used as a period. Alternatively, as a vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are vibrated every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. The vibration mode may be controlled to switch between a period and an OFF period in which vibration is not performed. On the other hand, as the vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the low SP reach effect is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are continuously vibrated for 2000 milliseconds. You may control to a vibration mode. A case may be provided in which the lighting mode of the lighting effect is different between the operating part effect when the ready-to-win effect of the strong SP reach is executed and the operation effect when the ready-to-win effect of the weak SP reach is executed. For example, as a light emission effect included in the operation part effect when the reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated in gold every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. It may be controlled so that the light emission mode is switched between (lighting) and non-lighting (extinguishing). On the other hand, as a light emission effect included in the operation part effect when the low SP reach effect is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are vibrated continuously for 2000 milliseconds. The control lever and the push button 31B may be controlled to emit gold light.

In the vibration pattern AKV41, it becomes a vibration mode of the ON period interlocked with the movable body operation in the reach effect of the SP reach A. In the vibration pattern AKV42, it becomes a vibration mode of the ON period interlocked with the screen display in the SP reach A reach performance. In the vibration pattern AKV43, it becomes a vibration mode of the ON period interlocked with the music reproduction in the SP reach A reach effect. The vibration pattern AKV44 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 3000 milliseconds or longer.

The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV41 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the movable body motion in the reach effect of SP reach A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the movable body motion in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the emission color in the specific light emitting effect becomes blue as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate. The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV42 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the image display in the SP reach A reach effect. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the light emission color in the specific light emitting effect becomes gold as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate. The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV43 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the music reproduction in the SP reach A reach effect. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the emission color in the specific light emitting effect changes from blue through red to gold as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate.

The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV44 is a special vibration performance included in the specific interlocking performance executed together with the notification of the confirmation of the big hit, and a special vibration performance included in the specific interlocking performance executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2. There are cases and cases. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the notification of the confirmation of the big hit, the light emission color in the specific light emitting effect becomes rainbow with the vibration of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH1, the emission color in the specific light emitting effect becomes white as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH2, the light emission color in the specific light emitting effect becomes rainbow as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate.

FIG. 13-4 shows an execution example of an effect by vibrating and emitting light on the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Here, a plurality of effect execution examples AKA01 to AKA07 are shown according to the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the emission color of the push button 31B. It should be noted that the lever lamp 9B1 provided on the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the button lamp 9B2 provided on the push button 31B are in the normal light emission state, with the light emission brightness set to be low, and the color of light emitted. It suffices if the light is emitted so as to be white. Alternatively, in the normal light emission state, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be set to non-light emission.

Effect execution example AKA01 is a case of executing a lighting effect in which the operation lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B emit white light. In the case of executing the operation part presentation by any one of the operation part presentation patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32, the emission color becomes white. The operation part effect pattern AKC01 can be used when executing the operation part effect at the start of the preliminary variation. The operation part effect pattern AKC11 can be used when executing the operation part effect at the start of the target change. Both of the operation part effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be used when executing the operation part effect at the time of reach development. The operation part effects by the operation part effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31 and AKC32 all have a jackpot reliability of 50% or more. The operation part presentation by the operation part presentation pattern AKC01 includes the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV01. The operation part presentation by the operation part presentation pattern AKC11 includes the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation part production by the operation part production pattern AKC31 includes the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV21. The operation part production by the operation part production pattern AKC32 includes the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV22. Also when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed as the specific effect, the light emission color is white.

Effect execution example AKA02 is a case of executing a light emission effect in which the operating lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B emit light in red. In the case of executing the operation part effect by either the operation part effect pattern AKC02 or AKC12, the light emission color becomes red. The operation part effect pattern AKC02 can be used when the operation part effect is executed at the start of the advance variation. The operation part effect pattern AKC12 can be used when executing the operation part effect at the start of the target change. The operation part effects by the operation part effect patterns AKC02 and AKC12 all have a jackpot reliability of 70% or more. The operation part presentation by the operation part presentation pattern AKC02 includes the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation part presentation by the operation part pattern AKC12 includes the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV03. Even when the music reproduction of the SP reach A is executed as the specific effect, the effect period in which the light emitting color is red is included.

Effect execution example AKA03 is a case of executing a lighting effect in which the operating lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B emit light in rainbow colors. In the case of executing the operation part presentation by either of the operation part presentation patterns AKC03 and AKC13, the light emission color becomes rainbow. The operation part effect pattern AKC03 can be used when the operation part effect is executed at the start of the preliminary variation. The operation part effect pattern AKC13 can be used when executing the operation part effect at the start of the target change. The operation part effects by the operation part effect patterns AKC03 and AKC13 all have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation part presentation by the operation part presentation pattern AKC03 includes the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation part production by the operation part production pattern AKC13 includes the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV03. Also when executing the jackpot decision notification or the jackpot type lottery CH2 as the specific effect, the light emission color becomes rainbow.

Effect execution example AKA04 is a case of executing a light emitting effect in which the operation lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B emit pink light. In the case of executing the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC21, the light emission color becomes pink. The operation part effect pattern AKC21 can be used when the operation part effect is executed when the reach is developed. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC21 has a big hit reliability of 100%. The operation part production by the operation part production pattern AKC21 includes the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV11.

Effect execution example AKA05 is a case of executing a light-emitting effect in which the operating lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B emit orange light. In the case of executing the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC22, the light emission color becomes orange. The operation part effect pattern AKC22 can be used when the operation part effect is executed when the reach is developed. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC22 has a big hit reliability of 100%. The operation part production by the operation part production pattern AKC22 includes the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV12.

Effect execution example AKV06 is a case of executing a light emission effect in which the operating lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B emit blue light. When executing the operation section effect, the emission color never turns blue. When executing the movable body action of SP reach A as the specific effect, the light emission color becomes blue. In addition, even when the music reproduction of SP reach A is executed as the specific effect, the effect period during which the light emitting color is blue is included.

Effect execution example AKV07 is a case of executing a light-emitting effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated in gold. When executing the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC41, the light emission color becomes gold. The operation part effect pattern AKC41 can be used when the operation part effect is executed at the time of winning/failure notification. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC41 has a big hit reliability of 100%. The operation part production by the operation part production pattern AKC41 includes the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV31. When the image display of SP reach A is executed as the specific effect, the light emission color becomes gold. In addition, even when the music reproduction of SP reach A is executed as the specific effect, the effect period in which the luminous color is gold is included.

As described above, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the light emitting color of the push button 31B may differ or may be common depending on the execution timing of the operation section effect, the reliability of the big win, and the vibration mode in the vibration effect. In addition to the light emission color, for example, the light emission time, the number of light emission (blinking number), the light emission period (blinking period), the light emission brightness, etc., can be used to determine the execution timing of the operation part production, the reliability of the jackpot, and the vibration in the vibration production. Depending on the mode, they may be different or common.

The operation part effect can be executed as a pre-reading forewarning effect or a continuous forewarning effect when it is executed at the start of the preliminary fluctuation. The pre-reading advance notice effect suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" before the variable display to be suggested. The continuous advance notice effect continuously indicates whether or not the result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" over a plurality of variable displays executed before the variable display to be suggested. A continuous advance notice effect can be executed using a continuous effect pattern for each number of reserved memories. The number of reserved memories here may be the number of special figure reserved memories at the time of starting winning. As the continuous effect pattern for each number of reserved memories, a plurality of continuous effect patterns are prepared in advance according to the effect mode for each remaining number of times. The remaining number of times is set to the special figure reservation memory number at the time of starting winning, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display is performed. Then, when the variable display to be suggested is executed, the remaining number of times becomes "0".

FIG. 13-5 shows a setting example of a continuous effect pattern used for executing the continuous advance notice effect. For the continuous effect pattern, for example, using a random number for determining the continuous effect pattern, referring to the continuous effect pattern determination table according to the number of pending memories, according to the winning judgment result, the determined value that matches the random value is assigned. It may be determined by judging the determination result that is given.

FIG. 13-5(A) shows continuous effect patterns AKD01 to AKD06 that can be used when the reserved storage number is "2". In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD01, the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation part effect pattern AKC11 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". A part production is executed. In the continuous announcement effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD02, the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation part effect pattern AKC12 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". A part production is executed. In the continuous announcement effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD03, the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC02 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation part effect pattern AKC12 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". A part production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD04, the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation part effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". A part production is executed. In the continuous announcement effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD05, the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC02 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation part effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". A part production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD06, the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC03 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation part effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". A part production is executed.

FIG. 13-5(B) shows continuous effect patterns AKD11 to AKD16 that can be used when the reserved storage number is "3". In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect patterns AKD11 to AKD16, when the remaining number of times is "2" or "1", the operation section effect is executed by one of the continuous effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03, and the remaining number of times is "0". When , an operation section effect is executed by any one of the continuous effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13.

FIG. 13-5(C) shows continuous effect patterns AKD21 to AKD26 that can be used when the reserved storage number is "4". In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect patterns AKD21 to AKD26, when the remaining number of times is any one of "1" to "3", the operation part effect by any of the continuous effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and the remaining number of times is When it is "0", the operation part effect by any one of the continuous effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

FIG. 13-6 is a flow chart showing an example of processing that can be executed in step S161 of FIG. 9 as the pre-reading notice setting processing. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 13-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101). The pre-reading notice condition may be set in advance as a condition for enabling the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, which is a continuous notice effect. In step AKS101, it is determined whether or not the effect control command (starting entrance winning designation command, pending memory number notification command, winning determination result command) transmitted at the time of starting winning has been received. If no command is received, it is determined that the pre-reading notice condition is not satisfied. When there is a command reception, the content of the notification by the received command is specified, and for example, the result of judgment at the time of winning is specified as the content of notification by the judgment result command at the time of winning.

The determination result at the time of winning determines whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and whether or not the variation pattern is determined to be a specific variation pattern, using the game random numbers extracted at the start of the winning. , The result determined by the starting winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process may be used. As the judgment result at the time of winning, for example, any one of the big win, determination of super reach at the time of loss, determination of reach at the time of loss, and general at the time of loss may be indicated. The determination result at the time of winning a big hit is a determination result corresponding to the case of being controlled to the big win game state corresponding to the case where the random number for determining the display result is within the big win determination range. Winning judgment result of super reach determination at the time of loss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where it is not controlled to the jackpot game state, and corresponds to the case where the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the super reach determination range at the time of loss This is the judgment result. Winning determination result of reach determination at the time of loss is included in the determination result corresponding to the case where it is not controlled to the jackpot game state, and the determination result corresponding to the case where the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the reach determination range at the time of loss is. If the judgment result at the time of general winning at the time of loss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where it is not controlled to the jackpot game state, and the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the confirmation range of super reach nor within the confirmation range of reach at the time of loss is a determination result corresponding to

It suffices if the pre-reading notice condition can be satisfied when the result of determination at the time of winning is either a big hit or determination of super reach at the time of loss. In addition, if the judgment result at the time of winning this time is either a big hit or a super reach determination at the time of loss, and the judgment results at the time of winning up to the previous time corresponding to the pending memory are all general at the time of loss, the pre-reading notice condition can be established. In addition, in the case where the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, which is a continuous notice effect, has already been set to start, the pre-reading notice condition may be restricted so as not to be satisfied.

If the pre-reading notice condition is not satisfied (step AKS101; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. If the pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice (step AKS102). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the execution of pre-reading notice, and referring to a pre-reading notice execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 according to the result of determination at the time of winning, Whether or not to execute the advance notice effect may be determined as the presence or absence of the advance notice execution. At step AKS102, it is determined to be either "not executed" when the pre-reading advance notice effect is not executed, or "executed" when the pre-reading notice effect is executed. Regarding the determination result at this time, it is determined whether or not it is determined to be "executed" (step AKS103).

If it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice effect is not to be executed (step AKS103; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. If it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice effect is to be executed (step AKS103; Yes), the remaining number of times is set (step AKS104). At step AKS104, the number of pending memories may be set as the remaining number of times. Subsequently, a continuous effect pattern is determined (step AKS105). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a continuous effect pattern, and referring to a continuous effect pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 according to the winning judgment result, a continuous effect pattern can be generated. should be determined as one of a plurality of patterns.

After the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105, setting during pre-reading notice is performed (step AKS106), and the pre-reading notice setting process is finished. In step AKS106, for example, a pre-reading notice in-progress flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (production control flag setting section, etc.) may be set to an ON state.

In such a pre-reading notice setting process, when the result of determination at the time of winning is either a big win or a super reach at the time of losing, the pre-reading notice condition in step AKS101 can be satisfied, and the pre-reading notice execution in step AKS102 is possible. It becomes possible to determine the presence or absence of a continuous effect pattern by step AKS105. When the judgment result at the time of winning is a big hit, even if it is decided to "execute" to execute the pre-reading notice effect by step AKS 102 at a higher rate than in the case where the judgment result at the time of winning is determination of super reach at the time of loss. good. In addition, in step AKS105, when the judgment result at the time of winning is a big hit, the continuous effect pattern may be determined at a rate different from the case where the judgment result at the time of winning is determination of super reach at the time of loss. In this way, it is only necessary to be able to execute the continuous announcement effect, which is the prefetch announcement effect, based on the winning determination result, which is the prefetch determination result.

FIG. 13-7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing that can be executed in step S171 of FIG. 9 as the variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 13-7, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol or the like to be the final decorative symbol as the variable display result of the decorative symbol (step AKS201). The performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop pattern based on the variable display contents such as the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command and the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. You just have to decide. When the variation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, the variation pattern specification command and the display result notification command are set to send the command at the start of the variation of the special symbol. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the performance control board 12 . The variation pattern specification command is an effect control command that specifies the variation pattern determined as the usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that specifies the variable display result determined using the random number value for special figure display result determination. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the variation pattern and the variable display result include "non-reach (losing)", "reach (losing)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". I wish I had.

If the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", the variable display state of the decorative pattern will not be in the ready-to-win state, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination will be stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be It becomes a "failure". When the variable display content is "ready (losing)", after the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win state, the determined decorative pattern of the ready-to-lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is "losing". becomes. When the variable display content is "unprobability variable (big win)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big win", and the game state after the big win game state is a time saving state. When the variable display content is "variable probability (big win)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big win", and the game state after the end of the big win game state becomes the variable probability state.

In step AKS201, for example, when the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)", a combination of fixed decorative symbols of the same even number symbol is determined as the final stop symbol. In addition, when the variable display content is "probability variation (big hit)", it is sufficient if a combination of fixed decorative symbols of the same odd-numbered symbols can be determined as the final stop symbol. When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", a combination of fixed decoration symbols that will be a combination of reach loss as the final stop symbol is determined. When the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is a non-reach losing combination is determined as the final stop symbol. When determining the combination of fixed decoration patterns, for example, numerical data that is a random number value for design determination is extracted, and according to the variable display content, by referring to a pattern determination table that is stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. What is necessary is just to determine the stop design of the decoration design.

After determining the final stop pattern, etc., the operation part presentation is determined (step AKS202). At step AKS202, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading announcement effect is being executed. For example, when the pre-reading notice flag is ON, it may be determined that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. When the pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed, the remaining number of times is subtracted by 1, and the operating part effect pattern is determined according to the remaining number of times after the subtraction and the continuous effect pattern. As for the continuous effect pattern, the one determined in step AKS105 of the pre-reading notice setting process may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM122. If the remaining number of times after the subtraction is "0", the pre-reading notice in-progress flag should be cleared and turned off.

In step AKS202, if it is determined that the pre-reading announcement effect is not being executed, the presence or absence of the operation part effect and the operation part effect pattern corresponding to the variable display of this time may be determined at a predetermined rate. For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the operation part effect is extracted, and depending on whether or not the variable display result is a "jackpot", a prepared operation part effect determination table stored in advance in the RAM 121 is referred to. It is only necessary to determine the presence or absence of operation part effects, ie, whether or not to execute the operation part effects, and the operation part effect pattern to be used when executing the operation part effects. The operation part effect corresponding to the variable display this time becomes executable when it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is not being executed, and it becomes unexecutable when it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. . Therefore, the operating part effect corresponding to this variable display is limited so that it cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display within the range of the variable display in which the operating part effect included in the pre-reading notice effect is executed. There is a limit set.

In step AKS202, when a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect is executed along with the specific effect based on the variation pattern, execution of the operation part effect may be restricted. For example, when the ready-to-reach effect of SP reach A is executed, execution of the operation part effect may be restricted by determining not to execute the operation part effect at any timing. In this case, within the range of the variable display in which the ready-to-win effect of the SP reach A is executed, a limitation is provided as a limit so that all the operation part effects cannot be executed while the variable display is being executed. Alternatively, when the reach performance of SP reach A is executed, it is possible to decide to execute the operation part performance at a predetermined ratio at the timing corresponding to the start of target fluctuation or the establishment of reach, while at the time of development of reach or Execution of the operation part presentation may be restricted by determining not to perform the operation part presentation at the timing corresponding to the winning/failure notification. In this case, within the range of the variable display in which the SP reach A ready-to-reach effect is executed, a limitation is provided so that some operation part effects cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display. . In addition, in the range of variable display in which a specific effect is executed, a limit may be provided so that part or all of the operation section effect is difficult to execute while the variable display is being executed. Thus, the effect control CPU 120 that determines the operation part effect in step AKS202 can limit the execution of the operation part effect including the vibration effect when the special vibration effect is executed.

Note that, in the case where the operation section effect is determined in step AKS202, when a special effect different from the specific effect is executed based on the variation pattern or the result of determination at the time of prize winning, the effect is greater than when the special effect is not executed. A determination ratio of the operation part effects may be set so that part or all of the operation part effects are likely to be executed during execution of the variable display.

After determining the operation part effect, one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance is determined as the effect control pattern (step AKS203). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (variable display effect control pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as the usage pattern. . In addition, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (operation part effect control pattern) corresponding to the operation part effect determined in step AKS202, and sets it as a usage pattern. good. Also, for example, the initial value of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area (production control timer setting section, etc.) of the RAM 122 is set (step AKS204). Then, the variation of the decoration pattern or the like is started on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS205). At this time, for example, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (variable display effect control pattern) determined in step AKS203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, the image The variation of the decorative design may be started in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the screen of the display device 5.

After setting the start of the variable display, settings are made for updating the pending display and the like in response to the start of the variable display (step AKS206). After updating the pending display, etc., the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step AKS207), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 13-8 shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The production control pattern includes a variable display production control pattern shown in FIG. 13-8(A) and an operation unit production control pattern shown in FIG. 13-8(B). The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 13-8 (A) executes various effects from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command. contains control data used to control the The operation part effect control pattern shown in FIG. 13-8(B) includes control data used for controlling the execution of the operation part effect.

The variable display effect control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, effect control process timer judgment value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, vibration control data, end code, etc. . The production control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) that is compared with the production control process timer value, which is the stored value of the production control process timer, and is a judgment value corresponding to the execution time (production time) of each production operation. is preset. In place of the production control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined production control command is received from the main board 11, or a prescribed process is executed as a process for controlling the production operation in the production control CPU 120. Data indicating switching timing of effect control, etc., may be set corresponding to predetermined control contents and processing contents.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 . The audio control data includes data indicating the output mode of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects linked to the variable display of decorative patterns. That is, the audio control data is data that designates audio output operations from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern includes, for example, data indicating the light emission driving mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern for light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. That is, the lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern is data that designates the light emission mode of the light emitter during the variable display of the decoration pattern.

The operation detection control data includes, for example, an effective detection period for effectively detecting a player's operation, such as a tilting operation on the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, an instruction operation on a trigger button, or a pressing operation on the push button 31B, and each operation. Data indicating the effect operation mode according to the detection of the player's motion, such as data designating the control contents of the effect operation when is effectively detected, is included. The vibration control data of the variable display effect control pattern includes, for example, data indicating the ON period and driving mode of the vibration motor 131 during the variable display of the decoration pattern. That is, the vibration control data of the variable display effect control pattern is data specifying the vibration mode of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during the variable display of the decoration pattern corresponding to the variation pattern.

It should be noted that these control data do not have to be included in all the production control patterns, but the production control pattern that includes some control data according to the content of the production operation by each production control pattern. There may be Further, in the plurality of types of process data included in the production control pattern, the types of control data forming each process data may differ according to the content of the production operation executed at each timing. That is, some process data includes all of display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and vibration control data, while other process data includes some of these data. you can Furthermore, various other control data such as movable body control data indicating the operation mode of the movable body 32 may be included.

In the production process during variable display in step S172 of the production control process process, each time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches with any of the production control process timer determination values, and if it matches controls performance operations according to various corresponding control data. Thus, the effect control CPU120, according to the contents of the process data #1 ~ process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern, the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, light emitters such as decorative LEDs, vibration motor 131, movable body 32, etc.) are progressed. In each process data #1 to process data #n, display control data #1 to display control data #n, voice control data #1 to voice control, which are associated with the performance control process timer determination values #1 to #n Data #n, lamp control data #1 to lamp control data #n, operation detection control data #1 to operation detection control data #n, and vibration control data #1 to vibration control data #n control the performance operation of the performance device. Effect control execution data #1 to effect control execution data #n that indicate the contents and specify the execution of effect control are configured.

The operation section effect control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, effect control process timer determination value, lamp control data, vibration control data, and the like. The lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitters in the operation part effect, such as the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. That is, the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern is data specifying the lighting mode when the operation lever of the stick controller 31B and the push button 31B are to emit light in the light emission effect included in the operation part effect. The vibration control data of the operation part effect control pattern includes data indicating the ON period and driving mode of the vibration generator in the operation part effect, such as driving of the vibration motor 131 . That is, the vibration control data of the operation part effect control pattern is data specifying the vibration mode when vibrating the operation lever of the stick controller 31B and the push button 31B in the vibration effect included in the operation part effect.

FIG. 13-9 shows a setting example of the timing at which the operation section effect can be executed in the vibration effect execution example AKE01. Timings AKT01 to AKT03 correspond to the start of the variable display of decorative symbols as the preliminary variation, and are timings at which the operation section presentation at the start of the preliminary variation can be executed. For example, when the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the pre-reading notice setting process, depending on the remaining number of times, the operation part effect is executed at some or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at which the advance fluctuation starts. be able to. For example, when the remaining number of times is "3", the operation part effect can be executed at timing AKT01, and when the remaining number of times is "2", the operation part effect can be executed at timing AKT02, and the remaining number of times is is "1", it is possible to execute the operation section effect at the timing AKT03.

Timing AKT11 shown in FIG. 13-9 corresponds to the start of the variable display of the ornamental pattern as the target variation, and is the timing at which the operation section effect at the start of the target variation can be executed. For example, when the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the pre-reading notice setting process, the operation part by the operation part effect pattern according to the remaining number of times at some or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03 that are the timing of the advance fluctuation start At the timing AKT11 when the object variation starts after the execution of the effect, the operation part effect according to the operation part effect pattern corresponding to the remaining number of times "0" can be executed. Also, at the timing AKT11, which is the time when the target variation starts, there is a case where the operation part effect can be executed. Specifically, when any one of the operation part effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is determined in step AKS202, the operation part effect by the determined operation part effect pattern is executed at the timing AKT11, which is the target variation start time. be able to.

Timings corresponding to the start of the variable display of decorative patterns, such as timings AKT01 to AKT03 or timing AKT11, may be capable of executing the operation section effect at the same time as the variable display of decorative patterns is started. , it may be possible to execute the operation section effect when a certain period of time has passed since the variable display of the decoration pattern was started. In this way, the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display of the decorative design may be any timing that can be reached by the start of the variable display of the decorative design.

Timings AKT12 to AKT14 shown in FIG. 13-9 are the operating part effects corresponding to the variable display this time, including the operating part effects when reach is established, the operating part effects when ready is developed, and the operating part effects when winning or failing notification. It is the timing when each can be executed. For example, according to the operation part effect pattern determined in step AKS202 of the variable display start setting process, the operation part effect can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, and the operation part effect can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed. can be executed, and there are cases where the operation section effect can be executed at the timing AKT14, which is the timing of the success/fail notification. Specifically, in step AKS202, when one of the operation part production patterns AKC21 and AKC22 is determined, at timing AKT12 when reach is established, the operation part production pattern is executed according to the determined operation part production pattern. can be done. Further, when either of the operation part effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32 is determined in step AKS202, the operation part effect by the determined operation part effect pattern can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the ready-to-win situation develops. Alternatively, when the operation part effect pattern AKC41 is determined in step ASK202, the operation part effect pattern can be executed at the timing AKT14, which is the timing of the success/failure notification.

FIG. 13-10 shows a control example of the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white shown in FIG. 13-10(A) and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 shown in FIG. It can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the timings when the pre-variation starts. As shown in FIG. 13-10(B), the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which ON periods and OFF periods are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 13-10(A), the light emission effect associated with this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. In the OFF period of the vibration presentation, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are turned off and extinguished. The light emission effect in which the light emission color changes to white according to the ON period of the vibration effect is, for example, a first luminance with a high white light emission luminance and a second luminance with a low light emission luminance every 30 milliseconds during an on period of 300 milliseconds. may be alternately repeated to periodically change the luminance of the white light.

FIG. 13-11 shows a control example of the operation part presentation by the operation part presentation patterns AKC02 and AKC03. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC02 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes red shown in FIG. 13-11(A) and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. It can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start times of advance fluctuation. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC03 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes rainbow color shown in FIG. 13-11(A) and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 13-11(B). , at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start times of advance fluctuation. The vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the ON period of 1500 milliseconds continues, as shown in FIG. 13-11(B). As shown in FIG. 13-11(A), the light emitting effect associated with this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are continuously red in the operation part effect pattern AKC02 in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. If it is the operating section effect pattern AKC03, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in rainbow colors. For example, the plurality of LEDs that make up the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light with red, reddish purple, bluish purple, blue, green, yellow, and orange transitions according to the elapsed time and the light emitting position. , the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 should emit rainbow colors. For the light emitting positions of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, a plurality of sections can be specified, for example, the upper and lower portions of the lever lamp 9B1 and the entire button lamp 9B2. All or part of the luminance can be set.

FIG. 13-12 shows a control example of the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC11. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC11 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white shown in FIG. 13-12(A) and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. It can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts. The vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the ON period of 1500 milliseconds continues, as shown in FIG. 13-12(B). As shown in FIG. 13-12(A), the light emission effect associated with this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. The light emission effect in which the light emission color changes to white according to the on period of the vibration effect is, for example, a first luminance with a high light emission luminance and a second luminance with a low light emission luminance every 30 milliseconds during the on period of 1500 milliseconds. may be alternately repeated to periodically change the luminance of the white light.

FIG. 13-13 shows an example of control of the operation part presentation by the operation part presentation patterns AKC12 and AKC13. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes red shown in FIG. 13-13(A) and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. It can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC13 includes the light emission effect in which the emission color becomes rainbow color shown in FIG. 13-13(A) and the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. 13-13(B). , at timing AKT11, which is the time when the target variation starts. The vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the ON period of 3000 milliseconds continues, as shown in FIG. 13-13(B). As shown in FIG. 13-13(A), the light emitting effect associated with this vibration effect is intermittent with the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in red if the operation part effect pattern AKC12 is matched with the on period of the vibration effect. , and if it is the operating section rendering pattern AKC13, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit rainbow colors. For example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 alternately repeat a first luminance with a high emission luminance of red and a second luminance with a low emission luminance every 20 milliseconds during the ON period of the vibration effect, thereby emitting red light. The brightness may change periodically. In this case, the light emission effect included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC12 changes the light emission brightness at a shorter cycle than the light emission effect included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC11. becomes. As described above, as a rendering mode of the lighting rendering, not only the lighting color but also the lighting period may be changed so as to indicate the reliability of the big win. Note that red light may be emitted intermittently by alternately repeating red light emission and non-light emission every 20 milliseconds during the ON period of the vibration effect. As an effect mode of the light emission effect, while the light emission cycle is common, the light emission color may be made different to indicate the reliability of the big win. In this way, for example, when the luminescent colors in the luminous effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the luminous effect by standardizing the luminescence cycle.

FIGS. 13 and 14 show control examples of the operation part presentation by the operation part presentation pattern AKC21. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC21 can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, corresponding to the effect AKR1 which becomes the effect when the reach is established shown in FIG. 13-14(C) includes a light emission effect in which the light emission color becomes pink and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 shown in FIG. 13-14(C). The effect AKR1, which is the effect when the ready-to-win state is established, may be, for example, the effect of displaying a effect image showing the reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or the effect of displaying a background image corresponding to the establishment of the ready-to-win state. In addition, any production associated with establishment of reach may be used. As shown in FIG. 13-14(C), the vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV11 is a vibration mode in which ON periods and OFF periods are alternately repeated multiple times every predetermined time (for example, 100 milliseconds). As shown in FIG. 13-14(B), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit pink light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. In the OFF period of the vibration presentation, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are turned off and extinguished.

FIGS. 13 to 15 show control examples of operation part effects by means of the operation part effect pattern AKC22. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC22 can be executed in response to the effect AKR2 which becomes the effect when the reach is established shown in FIG. 13-15(C) includes a light emission effect in which the emission color is orange, and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 shown in FIG. 13-15(C). The effect AKR2, which is the effect when ready-to-win is established, may be, for example, a effect of displaying an effect image showing the reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or an effect of displaying a background image corresponding to the establishment of ready-to-win. In addition, any production associated with establishment of reach may be used. It is sufficient that the effects AKR1 and AKR2, which are effects at the time of establishment of ready-to-win state, have different effects. As shown in FIG. 13-15(C), the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV12 is an ON period of the first vibration ON time (for example 100 milliseconds) and an OFF period of the first vibration OFF time (for example 100 milliseconds). After two alternating repetitions, a vibrating mode comprising an on period of a second vibrating on time (eg, 250 ms) and an on period of a third vibrating on time (eg, 500 ms). As shown in FIG. 13-15(B), the light emission effect associated with this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit orange light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. In the OFF period of the vibration presentation, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are turned off and extinguished. In addition, when the ON period of the vibration effect is different from the vibration ON time, the light emission pattern of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be changed. For example, during the ON period of the first vibration ON time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 continuously emit orange light. On the other hand, during the ON periods of the second vibration ON time and the third vibration ON time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 intermittently emit orange light. The lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 intermittently emit orange light by alternately repeating orange light emission and non-light emission every 20 milliseconds during the ON period of the second vibration ON time and the third vibration ON time. do it.

The operation part effects by the operation part effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be executed corresponding to the effects AKS1 and AKS2 which are the effects when the reach develops at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops, and the light emission color becomes white. , and a vibration performance by the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. In the case of the operation part production pattern AKC31, the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV21 becomes the vibration mode of the ON period in accordance with the production AKS1. In the case of the operation part production pattern AKC32, the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV22 becomes a vibration mode of the ON period according to the production AKS2. As for the light emission effect associated with these vibration effects, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect in any of the operation part effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32.

The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC41 can be executed corresponding to the win/fail effect at the timing AKT14 when the win/fail notification effect is performed. ,including. The vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV31 is a vibration mode in which the ON period is 1500 milliseconds or longer. In the light emitting effect associated with this vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit gold light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect.

As shown in FIGS. 13-12 and 13-13, among the operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts, the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect is white. , and when the emission color is red or iridescent, which is different from white, and when the emission color is white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or iridescent. In this case, a vibration effect is executed by a vibration pattern AKV03 different from the vibration pattern AKV02. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs between when the luminescent color is white and when the luminescent color is red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be used. To improve amusement in a game by properly diversifying performances. It should be noted that, in both the case where the luminous color is red and the case where the luminous color is rainbow, the common vibration pattern AKV03 is used for vibration presentation. In other words, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the case where the luminescent color is red and the case where the luminescent color is rainbow. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section effect is common, regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect, there may be provided a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common.

The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start time of the target variation, include the operation part effects with the operation part effect pattern AKC11, and the execution of the light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white with the vibration effect with the vibration pattern AKV02. I'm in. Operation part effects that can be executed at timing AKT13 when reach develops include operation part effects using operation part effects patterns AKC31 and AKC32. contains something In this way, the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts and the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops become white, which is the common emission color, and the vibration effect are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is common, whereas the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is used. To improve amusement in a game by properly diversifying performances. Note that the operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start time of the target variation, include the operation part effects that use the operation part effects patterns AKC12 and AKC13, and the lighting effects that make the emission color red or rainbow. there is As in this case, the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts and the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops are different in the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the vibration effect may also have different vibration modes. As in the case where the light emission color becomes white, the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts is different from the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops. Including what they have in common. Further, as in the case where the light emission color becomes red or rainbow, the operating part effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts is the operating part effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops. The effects may include different lighting modes. The operation part effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the ready reach develops does not have to include the lighting mode of the light emission effect different from the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts.

At the timing AKT12 when reach is established, the operation part effects that can be executed are the operation part effects with the operation part effects patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emission effects that change the light emission color to pink or orange with the vibration effects of the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. All of these operating part effects have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT14, which is the timing of the winning/failure notification, include the operation part effects with the operation part effect pattern AKC41, such as the operation part effects with the vibration pattern AKV31. I'm in. This operating part presentation has a jackpot reliability of 100%. In this way, the operation part performance executed at the timing AKT12 when the ready-to-win is established and the operation part performance performed at the timing AKT14 when the success/failure notification is inflated, the reliability of the big hit is common at 100%, and the vibration performance are different. Further, the operating part effect executed at the timing AKT12 when the ready-to-win state is established and the operating part effect executed at the timing AKT14 when the success/failure notification is inflicted have different emission colors and different vibration modes of the vibration effects. In this way, when the timings for executing the operation part effects are different, the reliability of the big hit is common, but the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, or the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, so that the stick controller 31A , and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified to improve the amusement of the game.

The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, include the operation part effects with the operation part effects patterns AKC11 to AKC13. Includes those that perform lighting effects. At the timing AKT12 when reach is established, the operation part effects that can be executed are the operation part effects with the operation part effects patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emission effects that change the light emission color to pink or orange with the vibration effects of the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. In this way, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different between the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts and the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, and the vibration of the vibration effect. A case where the mode is different is provided. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are appropriately diversified. It is possible to improve the game interest.

At the timing AKT12 when reach is established, the operation part effects that can be executed are the operation part effects with the operation part effects patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emission effects that change the light emission color to pink or orange with the vibration effects of the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops include the operation part effects with the operation part effects patterns AKC31 and AKC32, and the light emission effects that change the emission color to white with the vibration effects with the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. contains things. In this way, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the operating part effect executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operating part effect performed at the timing AKT13 when the ready reach develops, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect. There are different cases. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part production is different, the lighting mode of the lighting production is different, or the vibration mode of the vibration production is different. Appropriate diversification can improve game interest. Note that the operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the ready-to-win state is established may include execution of a light emission effect in which the light emission color becomes white. Also, the operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed may include execution of a light emission effect in which the light emission color becomes pink or orange. As a result, when the timing of executing the operation part production is different, even if the light emission mode of the light emission production is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration production is different, so that the production using the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be performed. Appropriate diversification can improve game interest.

The jackpot reliability when the operating part performance is executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 which are the timings of starting the advance variation is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% depending on the operating part performance pattern. The jackpot reliability when the operation part performance is executed at the timing AKT11 which is the target variation start time is any one of 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% according to the operation part performance pattern. The reliability of the big hit when the operation part performance is executed at the timing AKT12 when the ready-to-win state is established becomes 100% regardless of the operation part performance pattern. The reliability of the jackpot when the operating part performance is executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed is 50% or more regardless of the operating part performance pattern. The reliability of the big hit becomes 100% when the operation part presentation is executed at the timing AKT14 which is the timing of the success/failure notification. Therefore, the jackpot reliability when the operation section effect is executed may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed. Further, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect. Note that the vibration mode of the vibration presentation includes the duration of the vibration corresponding to the length of the ON period, the vibration intensity by driving the vibration motor 131, the combination of the ON period and the OFF period, the combination of the strong vibration and the weak vibration in the vibration intensity, and others. , the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, and other arbitrary vibration patterns for vibrating the operation members.

A plurality of specific effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game include movable body motion, image display, music reproduction, big win determination notification, and big win type lotteries CH1 and CH2 in the reach performance of SP reach A. The reach effect of the SP reach A has, for example, a jackpot reliability of about 40%. Therefore, when the vibration performance by the operation part performance is executed, the reliability of the big hit becomes higher than when the reach performance of the SP reach A is executed, and the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state when it is executed is high. Become. Movable body motion, image display, and music reproduction in the ready-to-win effect of SP reach-A are all executed as a part of the ready-to-win effect, so they do not have the reliability of big hits individually. Also, the big hit decision notification is an effect for definitely notifying that the variable display result will be a "big hit". The jackpot type lotteries CH1 and CH2 are jackpot type lottery effects corresponding to the number of rounds, etc., corresponding to the case of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot confirmation notification and jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 are similar to the reach performance of SP reach A in that the player can recognize without a doubt that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the game state is controlled to the jackpot. It is different from the production having a big hit reliability. As described above, among a plurality of specific performances, the reliability of the big win is higher when the vibration performance by the performance of the operating part is executed than when the specific performance having the reliability of the big win is executed. It should be set as follows. Also, the reliability of the big hit is set to be higher when the vibration performance by the operation part performance is executed than when the vibration performance by the operation part performance is not executed.

FIGS. 13 to 16 show an execution example of effects by making the game effect lamp 9 emit light. The game effect lamps 9 include an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M and a right frame lamp 9N which are different from the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. Here, a plurality of production execution examples AKF01 to AKF04 are shown according to the execution mode of the production by light emission.

In the effect execution example AKF01, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a white display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are caused to emit white light in accordance with the background display. , the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated in red by the light emission effect in the operation part effect. For example, the operation part effect by either the operation part effect patterns AKC02 or AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the light emission color changes to red along with the vibration effect.

In the effect execution example AKF02, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a red display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are caused to emit red light corresponding to the background display. , the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated in rainbow colors by the light emission effect in the operation part effect. For example, the operation part effect by either the operation part effect pattern AKC03 or AKC13 includes a light emission effect in which the light emission color becomes rainbow with the vibration effect.

In effect execution example AKF03, when the background display of image display device 5 changes from black to white from left to right, upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are displayed in the background display. While emitting light so as to change from black to white according to the color, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated in white by the light emission effect in the operation part effect. For example, the operation part effect by any one of the operation part effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white with the vibration effect.

In the effect execution example AKF04, when the character display on the image display device 5 is displayed in blue, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are caused to emit blue light corresponding to the character display. , the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated in white by the light emission effect in the operation part effect. For example, the operation part effect by any one of the operation part effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white with the vibration effect.

For example, the background display and character display of the image display device 5, and other predetermined effects by displaying an arbitrary effect image can be executed according to the progress of the game including the variable display of decorative symbols. In the effect process during variable display executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, the control data read from the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process is used to perform variable display, etc. Control is performed to execute a predetermined effect in accordance with the progress of the game. This control data includes display control data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, and lamp control data for controlling the light emission of the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N. there is During execution of such a predetermined effect, when the operation part effect is executed, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are operated by the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 to emit light due to the vibration effect in the operation part effect. can emit light in the following light emission mode. In the variable display effect process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, the control data read from the operation part effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process is used to control the operation part effect. Execution control is performed. The control data includes lamp control data for controlling the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, and vibration control data for controlling the vibration of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B by driving the vibration motor 131. It is included. In response to the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect in such an operation part effect, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N can emit light in a light emission mode different from the light emission effect of the operation part effect according to the predetermined effect. is. In this way, the operating members such as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B and the other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit light in different manners. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production by and improve the game interest.

In addition to the screen display of the image display device 5, or instead of the screen display of the image display device 5, the predetermined effect may be executed by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this case, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are caused to emit light in an emission color that matches the sound output such as BGM, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are operated. Light may be emitted in the light emission color of the light emission effect in the part effect. For example, when the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a message that gives the player an impression of red color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are caused to emit red light corresponding to the sound output. On the other hand, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be illuminated in white by the light emission effect in the operation part effect. Even in this way, the operation members such as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B and the other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N can be made to emit light differently. , it is possible to appropriately diversify the production by light emission and improve the amusement of the game. The predetermined effect is to darken the screen display of the image display device 5, stop the audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and turn off the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, etc. may be When this predetermined effect is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be vibrated by the vibration effect in the operation part effect. By executing the operation part effect during the execution of such a predetermined effect, the player's attention is further increased to the vibration effect of vibrating the operation member such as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

FIG. 13-17 shows a setting example of an effect period in which the specific interlocking effect can be executed in the vibration effect execution example AKE02. The period AKZ01 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed in accordance with the action of the movable body in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ01 includes a specific light emitting effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit blue light accompanying the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41. The period AKZ02 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV42 can be executed along with the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ02 includes a specific light emitting effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit gold in accordance with the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV42. The period AKZ03 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV43 can be executed along with the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed during the period AKZ03 includes a specific light emitting effect in which the color of light emitted from the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B changes from blue through red to gold in accordance with the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV43. .

The period AKZ04 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed along with the notification of the determination of the big hit. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ04 includes a specific light emitting effect in which the control lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit rainbow colors in accordance with the special vibration effect of the vibration pattern AKV44. The notification of the confirmation of the big hit includes stopping display of the confirmed decorative pattern which is the display result of the decorative pattern, display of a scene in which the friend character wins the battle with the enemy character in the ready-to-win effect, the speaker 8L, By outputting a notification sound indicating the confirmation of the big win by 8R, lighting the notification lamp of the confirmation of the big win included in the game effect lamp 9, or by combining some or all of these, the player can arbitrarily recognize the big win. It is sufficient if it is a case of executing the notification of.

It should be noted that, following the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC41 executed at the timing AKT14 which is the time of winning notification, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ04 associated with the notification of the determination of the big hit may be executed. In this case, the impression of the performance can be enhanced and the amusement of the game can be improved by executing the specific interlocking performance accompanying the announcement of the determination of the big win while the player's expectation is heightened by the performance of the operation part. When the specific interlocking effect is executed following such an operation part effect, the vibration mode of the vibration effect or the special vibration effect is changed between the operation part effect and the specific interlocking effect, or the light emission effect or the specific light emission effect is changed. The light emission modes may be varied. For example, the vibration intensity may be different between the vibration effect and the special vibration effect. The light emission brightness may be different between the light emission effect and the specific light emission effect. To make it possible to easily recognize the distinction between the operation part performance and the specific interlocking performance by making the vibration mode and the light emission mode different to give a sharpness to the performance, appropriately diversify the performance, and improve the amusement of the game. can be done.

The period AKZ05 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in association with the jackpot type lotteries CH1 and CH2. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ05 is a specific emission in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit white light in accordance with the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44 when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed. Includes performances. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ05 is that when the big win type lottery CH2 is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the emission color of the push button 31B become rainbow colors in accordance with the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44. Includes lighting effects.

FIGS. 13-18 to 13-20 show the case where SP reach A reach effect is executed. FIGS. 13-18 show production execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 when movable body motions in SP reach A reach production are executed. FIGS. 13-19 show production execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 when image display is executed in the SP reach A reach production. FIG. 13-20 shows production execution examples AKG21 to AKG23 when music reproduction is executed in the SP reach A reach production.

The position of the movable body 32 is not changed from the initial position when the variable display of the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win state and the ready-to-win performance of the normal ready-to-win is executed. The initial position of the movable body 32 may be any position that is in front of the lower end of the display screen of the image display device 5 . Subsequently, when the reach performance of SP reach A is started due to reach development, the position of the movable body 32 is changed from the initial position as in the performance execution example AKG01, and the movable body motion is performed. At this time, the position of the movable body 32 is changed by upward linear movement or parallel movement from the initial position. An effect image showing a message such as “Reach A” is displayed. Thereafter, as the position of the movable body 32 continues to be changed, the position of the movable body 32 passes through the vicinity of the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the effect execution example AKG02. At this time, at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window portion of the movable body 32, an effect image showing a message such as "This change is..." is displayed.

Along with the position change of the movable body 32 that becomes the movable body motion as in the performance execution examples AKG01 and AKG02, a specific interlocking performance is executed, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking effect executed together with the movable body motion in the reach effect of SP reach A includes a special vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV41 and a specific light emission effect in which the emission color becomes blue during the period AKZ01 shown in FIG. 13-17. , contains Furthermore, when the position of the movable body 32 continues to change and the position of the movable body 32 reaches the front of the upper end of the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the example of execution of the effect AKG03, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ01 ends. do. For example, the period AKZ01 corresponding to the time when the position of the movable body 32 reaches from the front of the lower end to the front of the upper end of the display screen, which is the initial position, is 2500 milliseconds. A special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode in which the lever or the push button 31B is vibrated during the ON period. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, the special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode that switches between an ON period in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate every 250 milliseconds and an OFF period in which they do not vibrate. Further, the specific light emission effect may be executed in a light emission mode in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B emits blue light continuously over the period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a specific light emission effect is executed in a light emission mode in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is switched between blue light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (extinguishing) every 250 milliseconds. good too.

When the movable body motion in the reach effect of SP reach A such as the effect execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 is executed, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N, for example, the position of the movable body 32 is changed. The light may be emitted in a light emission pattern in which the light emission color and light emission brightness gradually change from the lower side to the upper side as the light is emitted. For example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N emit blue light when the position of the movable body 32 is changed, and the light emission luminance changes in a wave shape according to height and time. It is sufficient to emit light in such a manner as to

After the movable body motion is completed as in the effect execution example AKG03, the effect image is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the effect execution example AKG11 as the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A. At this time, for example, the character display indicating the message "Extremely hot" is displayed in gold color. In addition, as in effect execution example AKG12, an effect image can be added around the character display and displayed.

Along with the display of the effect image that becomes the image display such as the effect execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, the specific interlocking effect is executed, and the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are caused to vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking effect that is executed together with the image display in the reach effect of SP reach A is, during the period AKZ02 shown in FIGS. contains. When the character display indicating the message ends and the display of the effect image in the ready-to-win effect different from the character display is started as in the effect execution example AKG13, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ02 ends. Note that, for example, the period AKZ02 corresponding to the character display indicating the message "Super hot" is 1000 milliseconds, and the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are vibrated continuously over this period AKZ02. You may perform special vibration production in a mode. Further, during the period AKZ02, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are operated in a light emitting mode in which a first brightness with a high gold emission brightness and a second brightness with a low emission brightness are alternately repeated every 10 milliseconds. A specific light emission effect may be executed.

When the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A such as the effect execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 is executed, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example. The light emission color should be gold in accordance with the image display and the light emission color of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. For example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N emit golden light as the effect image is displayed, which becomes an image display as in the effect execution examples AKG11 and AKG12. When the display of the effect image is started, light may be emitted in a color different from gold.

After the display of the effect image as in the effect execution example AKG13 is started, the sound of the music phrase PH01 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as in the effect execution example AKG21 as music reproduction in the reach effect of SP reach A. Subsequently, as in the effect execution example AKG22, the sound of the music phrase PH02 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. After that, as in production execution example AKG23, the sound of music phrase PH03 is output from speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, by sequentially outputting the sounds of a plurality of music phrases PH01 to PH03 in accordance with the progress of the production, it is sufficient that the entire musical composition can be reproduced in the SP reach A reach production.

Along with the output of the sound for music reproduction, such as the production execution examples AKG21 to AKG23, a specific interlocking production is executed, and the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are caused to vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking effect executed together with the music reproduction in the reach effect of SP reach A is a special vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV43, the emission color changes from blue to red, and further and a specific lighting effect that changes from red to gold. In the effect execution example AKG21, a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color becomes blue is executed in response to the sound output of the music phrase PH01. In the effect execution example AKG22, a specific light emission effect is executed in which the light emission color becomes red in response to the sound output of the music phrase PH02. In the effect execution example AKG23, a specific light emission effect is executed in which the light emission color becomes gold in response to the sound output of the music phrase PH03. In this way, it is sufficient to execute a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color changes to a plurality of colors as the sounds of a plurality of music phrases PH01 to PH03 are output in order according to the progress of the effect.

FIG. 13-21 shows a case where the musical scale changes in order as the performance progresses as a music reproduction execution example AKH01. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 13-21(A), during the period AKZ03 in which the specific interlocking effect can be executed with the music reproduction, each of do, re, mi, fa, sol, la, si, do Sounds corresponding to the scale are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Here, the scale of do that is output last may be one octave higher than the scale of do that is output first.

Such a specific interlocking effect that accompanies music playback includes a specific lighting effect in which the light emission color changes as shown in FIG. and a vibration effect that is a vibration effect, and can be executed in a period AKZ03 corresponding to music reproduction. The vibration effect shown in FIG. 13-21(C) is a vibration mode in which ON periods and OFF periods are alternately repeated multiple times in accordance with the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale. As shown in FIG. 13-21(B), the specific light emission effect associated with this special vibration effect is performed by lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 in accordance with the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale and the ON period of the special vibration effect. The color of the emitted light changes in order between blue, red, and gold. The lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and are extinguished during the stop period of the sound output and the OFF period of the special vibration effect. It should be noted that, in the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale, the lighting mode of the specific lighting effect may be changed for each scale. For example, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are caused to emit blue light continuously for a period corresponding to the scale of Do, which is output first. Next, during the period corresponding to the scale of re, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are caused to emit light in a light emission mode that alternately repeats a first luminance with a high red emission luminance and a second luminance with a low emission luminance. After that, during the period of the mi scale, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are caused to emit light in a light emission mode that switches between gold light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (extinguishing). In this way, by adopting a light emission mode in which the light emission amount differs for each light emission color corresponding to each musical scale, it is possible to appropriately diversify the presentation and improve the amusement of the game.

The reach effect of SP reach A is controlled to be executable by using the control data read from the variable display effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 13-8 (A) is based on lamp control data and vibration control data, and is accompanied by specific effects such as movable body operation, image display, and music playback in the reach effect of SP reach A. It is set to be able to execute a specific interlocking effect. In the specific interlocking effect, a special vibration effect can be executed by any one of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The special vibration effect by any of these vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 and the vibration effect by the vibration pattern in the operation part effect are different in vibration mode. In this way, the vibration mode is different between the vibration effect in the operation section effect that can be executed regardless of the specific effect and the special vibration effect in the specific interlocking effect that can be executed in accordance with the execution of the specific effect. It is possible to appropriately diversify the performance using the operation member such as the push button 31B, thereby improving the game interest.

When executing the operation part effect, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated using the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 along with the vibration effect of vibrating the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. A light emission effect is executed. When the specific interlocking effect is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are operated using the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 along with the special vibration effect that vibrates the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. A specific light emission effect that emits light is executed. By executing an effect including vibration and light emission of operation members such as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, the player who has been paying attention to the image display on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, can enjoy the image display and the image display. By recognizing the vibration and light emission of different operation members, the unexpectedness of the production is enhanced.

In the period AKZ01 shown in FIGS. 13-17, with the action of the movable body 32, which is the action of the movable object in the reach performance of the SP reach A, the specific interlocking performance including the special vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed. In this way, by executing the special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable body 32, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the period AKZ04 shown in FIGS. 13-17, along with the notification of the confirmation of the big hit, it becomes possible to execute a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44. In this way, by being able to execute the special vibration performance in accordance with the notification of the control to the jackpot game state, the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is appropriately diversified, and the game interest is improved. be able to.

The specific interlocking effect includes a specific light emitting effect by emitting light from the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 along with the special vibration effect by any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. A light emission mode such as a light emission color is different between the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect in the operation part effect and the specific light emission effect accompanying the special vibration effect in the specific interlocking effect. In this way, by differentiating the light emitting mode according to the operation part effect and the specific interlocking effect, the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are appropriately diversified, and the game interest is improved. can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 13-10 and 13-11, among the operation section effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 that are the start times of the preliminary fluctuation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect is white. , and the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color, which is different from white, and when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. In that case, a vibration effect is executed according to the vibration pattern AKV02. As shown in FIGS. 13-12 and 13-13, among the operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts, the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect is white. and cases where the emission color is red or iridescent, which is different from white, and when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and when the emission color becomes red or iridescent. , the vibration effect is executed by the vibration pattern AKV03. Therefore, the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 that is the start of the preliminary fluctuation and the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 that is the start of the target fluctuation. As well as being different, the vibration mode is also different. In addition, the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timing AKT01 that is the start time of the preliminary fluctuation and the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 that is the time of the start of the target fluctuation, and the light emission color is white and red. By becoming one of the rainbow colors, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, while the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common. It is possible to appropriately diversify the performance using the member and improve the game interest.

Vibration effects of operation part effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start times of advance fluctuations, are executed at timing AKT11, which is the start time of target fluctuations, based on the result of winning judgment, which is the result of pre-reading judgment. Executed in the variable presentation prior to the variable presentation to be executed. In this way, by varying the timing at which the operation part effects are executed, the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push buttons 31B can be appropriately diversified, and the game interest can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 13-10 and 13-11, among the operation section effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 that are the start times of the preliminary fluctuation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect is white. , and the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color, which is different from white, and when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. In that case, a vibration effect is executed according to the vibration pattern AKV02. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs between when the luminescent color is white and when the luminescent color is red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be used. To improve amusement in a game by properly diversifying performances. It should be noted that, in both the case where the luminescent color is red and the case where the luminescent color is iridescent, the vibration effect by the common vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration presentation is common between the case where the luminescent color is red and the case where the luminescent color is rainbow. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may be common regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The continuous effect pattern used for executing the continuous advance notice effect is an operation part effect pattern in which the light emission color in the light emission effect differs depending on whether the remaining number of times is other than '0' or when the remaining number of times is '0'. There is something that contains For example, the continuous effect pattern AKD02 shown in FIG. 13-5(A) includes an operating part effect pattern AKC01 when the remaining number of times is "1" and an operating part effect pattern AKC12 when the remaining number of times is "0". , contains The operation part presentation by the operation part presentation pattern AKC01 includes a light emission presentation in which the emission color is white. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the light emission color becomes red. Therefore, the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03 that is the start of the preliminary fluctuation, and the light emission effect that is accompanied by the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 that is the start of the target fluctuation , the light emission modes are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different. A game interest can be improved.

In the continuous performance pattern used for executing the continuous advance notice performance, the reliability of the big hit of the operation part performance pattern corresponding to the small number of remaining times is higher than the reliability of the big win of the operation part performance pattern corresponding to the large number of remaining times. is set to prevent it from becoming degraded. For example, in the continuous effect pattern shown in FIG. 13-5(A), if the operating part effect pattern AKC02 when the remaining number of times is "1", the operating part effect pattern when the remaining number of times is "0" , so as to prevent the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. If it is the operation part effect pattern AKC03 when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part effect pattern AKC11 or the operation part effect pattern AKC12 is assumed as the operation part effect pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". configured to prevent As a result, even though the operating part performance with high reliability of the big win is executed first at the start of the advance fluctuation, the performance of the operating part with low reliability of the big win is prevented from being executed later at the start of the target fluctuation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game without lowering the player's expectations.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-10 and 13-11, among the operation section effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 that are the timings of starting the preliminary fluctuation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is the light emission color When the light emission color becomes white, and when the light emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, when the light emission color becomes white, it emits light according to the ON period and OFF period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01. and non-light emission are repeated, and when the light emission color becomes red, light is continuously emitted in accordance with the ON period of the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV02. As shown in FIGS. 13-12 and 13-13, among the operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts, the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect is white. When the luminous color is white, it emits light according to the ON period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02, and the luminous color changes to red. In this case, light is emitted intermittently according to the ON period of the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV03. Since the setting of the ON period is different between the vibration effects by the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, the light emission mode such as the light emission period in the light emission effect is different. Even in this way, it is sufficient if the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different when the timing of executing the operating part effect is different.

(Modified example of characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK)
With respect to the operation part effect, the timing to be executed, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the reliability of the big win can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 or the like.

With respect to the performance of the operation part, the timing to be executed, the vibration mode of the vibration performance, the light emission mode of the light emission performance, and the reliability of the big win may be changed according to the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1, or the settings of the pachinko game machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the value. Regarding the specific interlocking performance, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the set values of the pachinko game machine 1, or the pachinko game machine 1. may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value of . In addition, with respect to the operation part effects, the timing to be executed, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the reliability of the big win may be varied according to an arbitrary degree of advantage regarding the game in the pachinko game machine 1, Different ratios may be determined according to such advantages. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the reliability of the big win may be changed according to the arbitrary advantage of the game in the pachinko game machine 1, Different ratios may be determined according to such advantages.

When the timing of executing the operation part production is different and common, when the vibration mode of the vibration production is different and common, and when the light emission mode of the light emission production is different and common, the reliability of the big hit is increased. The combination of each case, such as the case of being different and the case of being common, can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. When the execution timing is different or common between the operation part production and the specific interlocking production, When the vibration mode of the vibration production and the special vibration production is different and common, When the light emission production and the specific light emission production The combination of each case, such as the case of different cases and the case of being common, can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. In addition, when the vibration mode of vibration production|presentation differs, the light emission mode of light emission production|presentation should just be made common, and the control burden of light emission production|presentation can be reduced. When the light emitting modes of the light emitting effects are different, it is sufficient if the control burden of the vibration effect can be reduced by standardizing the vibration mode of the vibration effect. When a part of the vibration mode in the vibration performance is different, it is sufficient if the control burden of the vibration performance can be reduced by sharing the other vibration modes in the vibration performance. For example, when vibration intensities in the vibration presentation are different, the vibration period in the vibration presentation may be made common, thereby reducing the control burden of the vibration presentation. When part of the light emission mode in the light emission effect is different, it is sufficient if the control burden of the light emission effect can be reduced by standardizing the other light emission modes in the light emission effect. For example, when the luminescent colors in the luminous effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the luminous effect by standardizing the luminescence period in the luminous effect. As for the vibration mode of the special vibration effect and the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, it is sufficient if the control load can be reduced by similar commonality.

In addition to the execution of the variable display, or instead of the execution of the variable display, when it is controlled to an arbitrary game state such as a small winning game state or a big winning game state, an operation part performance or a specific interlocking performance is executed. It may be possible. For example, when it is controlled in a small winning game state, a predetermined ratio is determined according to whether or not the V winning attacker is opened, the opening time, the number of times it is opened, or the number of rounds of the big winning game state controlled after the occurrence of the V winning. It may be possible to execute the operation section effect with . When it is controlled to the jackpot game state, the presence or absence of time reduction control and probability variable control after the jackpot game state is finished, the end condition, and the number of rounds increased from the number of rounds previously notified in the jackpot game state. Depending on the presence or absence, the amount of increase, or the like, it may be possible to execute the operation section presentation at a predetermined ratio. It may be possible to execute a specific interlocking effect along with a specific effect such as movable object operation, image display, and music reproduction in the small winning game state or the big winning game state.

The specific effect that can be executed in the specific interlocking effect may be any effect that can be executed according to the execution of the variable display, or any effect that can be executed regardless of the execution of the variable display. For example, unlike the ready-to-win effect, when the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" at a predetermined rate and a suggestive effect is executed to suggest that the game state is controlled to a big win, a specific effect is specified in part or all of the effect period It may be possible to execute an interlocking effect.

When controlled to an arbitrary production state, the operation section production or the specific interlocking production may be made executable. For example, when it is controlled to a production state that is a special production mode, the operating part production and specific interlocking production are executed at a higher rate than when it is controlled to a production state that is a production mode different from the special production mode. It may be possible.

The operation member capable of executing the effect by vibration or light emission may be any motion detection member configured to be able to detect the motion of the player. For example, it may be a sensor that detects an operation on a jog dial that can be rotated, or a sensor that detects a touch operation or a press operation on a touch panel. Also, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. A predetermined camera may be used to photograph the player's hands, etc., and the results may be analyzed (video motion capture) to detect the actions of the player. In addition, any configuration that can mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined action by a player may be used. Along with such an action detection member, a contact member that a player can contact with a hand or the like may be provided, and the contact member may vibrate or emit light together with the action detection member or separately from the action detection member. .

The vibration effects included in the operation part effect can correspond to the vibration effect in the characteristic portion 48AK, the predetermined vibration effect in the characteristic portion 49AK, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the characteristic portion 50AK. Of the vibration effects included in the operation part effects, the vibration effects included in the operation part effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at which the pre-fluctuation starts can correspond to the first vibration effects in the feature part 50AK. Of the vibration effects included in the operation part effects, the vibration effect included in the operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at which the target variation starts can correspond to the second vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. The light emission effects included in the operation part effect are the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect in the characteristic portion 48AK, the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect in the characteristic portion 49AK, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the characteristic portion 50AK. It can correspond to light emission production. Of the light emission effects included in the operation part effects, the light emission effects associated with the vibration effects included in the operation part effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at which the preliminary fluctuation starts are the light emission associated with the first vibration effects in the feature part 50AK. Able to handle performances. Among the light-emitting effects included in the operation part effects, the light-emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect included in the operation part effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts is the light-emitting effect accompanying the second vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. can cope. The special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect can correspond to the special vibration effect in the characteristic portion 49AK.

In addition, in each characteristic part and modification described above, regarding the transition to the time saving state (high base state), there is a form to shift via the big hit state or small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is always operated. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when a time saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the time saving state (high base state) is displayed without operating the special variable winning ball device 7 ).

In addition, as the above-described time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be used as part of the winning symbols or may be used as part of the small winning symbols.

In addition, when performing the lottery processing related to the derivation display of the time saving pattern, the lottery may be executed using a special random number for the time saving pattern lottery in these lottery processing, or the lottery random number of the lost pattern and the big hit pattern The lottery may be performed using random numbers for other lotteries such as lottery random numbers for small winning symbols, random numbers for judging big win lottery, and lottery random numbers for falling lottery.

Further, these time-saving patterns may be a plurality of types of patterns, and may be used together with a combination of patterns displayed as other patterns, such as a small winning pattern or a losing pattern. In addition, in this case, whether or not to transition to the time saving state may be determined by a small winning symbol used in combination. However, when the time-saving pattern is won, the lottery for the presence or absence of transition to the time-saving state is not performed by lottery, and the number of times of time-saving is not drawn.

In addition, in the case of performing the lottery of the time-saving design, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving design does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving design in all the setting values are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different probabilities between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Also, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing time-saving symbols, even if a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the start opening (first start winning opening, 2nd starting prize opening) is acceptable.

In addition, regarding the winning of the time-saving design lottery, when using a special random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the lottery of the time-saving design is a small hit design. When a random number is used, a specific small hit pattern random number is used as the winning value, and when the random number for the falling lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, the random number for the falling lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the time-saving design may be won when the game ball passes through the time-saving area.

In addition, when the lottery of the time saving pattern is performed using a structure, when the small hit pattern uses the time saving pattern together, the variable display number of the time saving state (the number of times of time saving) does not change depending on whether the time saving area passes to

In addition, regarding the winning in the case of lottery of time-saving patterns, if random numbers are used for the lottery of time-saving patterns, a specific random number will be the winning value. A jackpot pattern random number value can be used as a winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performances other than the big hit probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the setting value cannot be changed.

Further, the judgment timing of the lottery result of the time saving pattern may be executed at the timing after the big hit judgment. In addition, the time-saving pattern lottery is executed only in the low-probability low-base state, without executing it in the time-saving state (high base) or high probability, regardless of which random value is used for the lottery. . However, when the time-saving pattern is derived and displayed in the state of the time-saving state, even if the number of times of time-saving is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each game machine.

In addition, as for the number of times of time saving when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of times of time saving according to the winning value (symbol) and each game state. Moreover, it is also possible to make the condition for providing time saving different for each time saving pattern.

Moreover, when the number of times of shortening of working hours differs according to the shortening of working hours pattern, it is possible to change the sorting lottery of the shortening of working hours pattern between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.例文帳に追加

Further, even when the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time saving given may differ according to the game state at that time. However, it is required that it is predetermined for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result of "zero number of times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving pattern in the low-probability low base state.

Also, a derivation lottery for time saving end patterns (time saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of times of time saving may be the number of times until the time saving end patterns are derived and displayed after the start of time saving or until the big win patterns are derived and displayed. In other words, without setting the number of times of time saving, in principle, it may be unlimited.

In addition, the number of times of time saving and the provision conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving pattern and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of the big hit.

Further, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the timing to be controlled to the time saving state is the time when the pattern fixing time of the time saving pattern has passed. However, when a small winning pattern random number is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, and when the small winning is won and shifts to the time saving state, the timing of controlling to the time saving state is the end of the small winning operation.

Also, in the case of lottery using structures, the timing of control to the time-saving state is the timing of the completion of the operation of the structures in the game state (for example, small winning state) in which the structures are operated.

In addition, in the case of a game machine controlled to a high-probability low-base state over a predetermined number of variable display times after a big hit (so-called specified number-of-times probability variable machine (ST machine)), a high-probability low-base state when the amusement center is opened. , and after the high-probability low-base state is executed a specified number of times of variable display and ends, control may be performed to the time-saving state.

In addition, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed when the time saving limiter function is installed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated.

Also, the design fixing time of the time saving pattern may be different from the design fixing time of the other patterns.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 48AK)
A game machine capable of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, comprising an operation means operable by the player, a vibration performance execution means capable of executing a vibration performance in which the operation means vibrates, and an operation means accompanied by the vibration performance. and a light emitting effect executing means capable of executing a light emitting effect to emit light, and the rate of control to an advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed, and the vibration effect Depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is different, and the vibration of the vibration effect is generated according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect. The mode is different. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The operating means may be, for example, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, or the like. The vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 according to the vibration pattern included in the operation part effect pattern. The vibration effect executing means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in a light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The light emission effect execution means may be the effect control CPU 120 or the like that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern determined in step AKS203, for example. The fact that the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed may be, for example, the reliability of the big hit according to the pattern of the operation part effect. The fact that the ratio of control to an advantageous state differs according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed means that, for example, the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern and the big hit according to the use of the operation part effect pattern. Reliability, etc. may be used. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different depending on the light emission mode of the light effect, for example, if the emission colors and vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 included in the operation part effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13 are used.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the player pay attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, or the like.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display changes to the reach mode may be timing AKT12, for example.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing at which the notification effect for informing whether or not the control is to be performed in the advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first light emitting. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different between the case where the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode and the case where the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second emission mode may be, for example, a case where the emission color is red or iridescent. The difference in the vibration mode may be, for example, the case of the vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode have a common light emission mode of the light emission effect, Vibration modes may differ. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The difference in the vibration mode may be, for example, the vibration pattern AKV02, which is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have a common ratio of control to an advantageous state when executed, and the vibration Aspects may vary. Here, the fact that the rate of being controlled to be in an advantageous state is common may be, for example, the case where the reliability of the big win is 100%. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect may be different between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is in the ready-to-reach mode, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the difference in light emission mode may be, for example, white, red, or rainbow colors, which are different from pink or orange colors. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect according to the timing, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration mode may be different between the vibration performance executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-win state and the vibration performance executed at the timing for executing the development performance after the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach state. Here, the different vibration modes may be, for example, the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

It comprises a first light emitting means for causing the operation means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When the vibration effect is executed at the time, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting effect according to the predetermined effect. There may be. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, or the like. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be display of a background image or a character image, for example. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, the image display device 5 or the like. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the lighting modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A line-of-sight guidance effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operation means is provided, and the vibration effect execution means performs the vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing. , the vibration effect can be executed, regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, the vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode, and the line of sight guidance effect executing means is capable of executing the line of sight at the first timing It may be possible to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing without executing the guidance effect. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L and 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3 and T4. A common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, at timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3. If the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3 may be performed.
With such a configuration, the vibration of the operation means can be appropriately recognized, and the interest of the vibration presentation can be sufficiently enhanced.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 49AK)
A game machine capable of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, comprising an operation means operable by the player and a vibration performance capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance and a special vibration performance as vibration performance in which the operation means vibrates. Execution means, light emitting effect executing means capable of executing light emitting effect of causing operation means to emit light according to predetermined vibration effect, and specific effect executing means capable of executing specific effect according to the progress of a game, wherein the predetermined vibration effect is provided. The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration performance is executed than when is not executed, and the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the predetermined vibration performance and the timing when the predetermined vibration performance is executed The ratio of control to an advantageous state differs depending on the state, the vibration performance executing means can execute the special vibration performance along with the execution of the specific performance, and the vibration mode differs between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance. . Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The operating means may be, for example, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, or the like. The predetermined vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 according to a vibration pattern included in the operation part effect pattern. The special vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The vibration effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation part effect control pattern or the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. Just do it. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The light emission effect execution means may be the effect control CPU 120 or the like that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern determined in step AKS203, for example. The specific effect may be, for example, reach effect of SP reach A, big hit determination notification, big hit type lottery, and the like. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed may be, for example, the reliability of the big hit according to the pattern of the operation part effect. The fact that the ratio of control to the advantageous state differs according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed is, for example, based on the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern and the use of the operation part effect pattern. It may be a big hit reliability or the like. The fact that the special vibration effect can be executed may be, for example, the execution of the vibration effect during periods AKZ01 to AKZ05. Vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 that are different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 may be used for the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect, for example.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the player pay attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, or the like.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display changes to the reach mode may be timing AKT12, for example.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing at which the notification effect for informing whether or not the control is to be performed in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emission mode and a second light emission mode different from the first light emission mode, and the light emission effect is the first light emission mode. The vibration mode of the predetermined vibration effect may be different between when it is performed in the light emission mode and when the light emission effect is performed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second emission mode may be, for example, a case where the emission color is red or iridescent. The different vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode have a common light emission mode of the light emission effect. Yes, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The different vibration mode may be, for example, the vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. , the vibration mode may be different. Here, the fact that the rate of being controlled to be in an advantageous state is common may be, for example, the case where the reliability of the big win is 100%. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and a predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode may differ in the light emission mode of the light emission performance and in the vibration mode. Here, the difference in light emission mode may be, for example, white, red, or rainbow colors, which are different from pink or orange colors. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect according to the timing, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display changes to the ready-to-reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing to execute the development effect after the variable display changes to the ready-to-reach mode. . Here, the different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 that are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The game machine comprises a first light emitting means for causing the operation means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When the predetermined vibration effect is executed at the time, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting effect according to the predetermined effect. It may be possible. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, or the like. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be display of a background image or a character image, for example. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, the image display device 5 or the like. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A line-of-sight guidance effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operation means is provided, and the vibration effect execution means performs the vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing. , a predetermined vibration effect can be executed, and regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, the predetermined vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode, and the visual guidance effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined vibration effect at the first timing , the visual guidance effect may be executed before the predetermined vibration effect is executed at the second timing without executing the visual guidance effect. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L and 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3 and T4. A common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, at timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3. If the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
With such a configuration, the vibration of the operation means can be appropriately recognized, and the interest of the vibration presentation can be sufficiently enhanced.

The ratio of control to an advantageous state may be higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the specific effect is executed. Here, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot expectation level of 50% or more, which is higher than when the SP reach A reach effect is executed.
With such a configuration, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the predetermined vibration effect and improve the game interest.

The specific effect executing means can execute the effect of operating the movable member as the specific effect, and the vibration effect executing means can execute the special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable member. Here, the effects for operating the movable member may be, for example, the effects execution examples AKG01 to AKG03. The special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable member may be, for example, a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV41.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration effects and improve the amusement of the game.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a special vibration effect in response to notification of being controlled in an advantageous state. Here, the notification of being controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot determination notification or the like. The special vibration effect that accompanies this notification may be, for example, a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV44.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration effects and improve the amusement of the game.

The light emitting effect executing means is capable of executing a specific light emitting effect of causing the operating means to emit light in conjunction with the special vibration effect, and the light emitting effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect and the specific light emitting effect associated with the special vibration effect differ in light emission mode. good too. Here, the specific light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The different luminescence mode may be, for example, a case where the luminescence color is white, red, or iridescent, rather than a case where the luminescence color changes from blue, gold, or blue to gold via red.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect and improve the game interest.

A limiting means may be provided for limiting the execution of the predetermined vibration effect when the special vibration effect is executed. Here, the restricting means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 when determining the operation part effect in step AKS202.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the vibration effect and improve the game interest.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 50AK)
A game machine capable of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and capable of executing a first vibration performance and a second vibration performance as a vibration performance in which an operation means operable by the player and the operation means vibrates. A vibration performance execution means and a light emission performance execution means capable of executing a light emission performance for causing the operation means to emit light along with the vibration performance are provided, and when the vibration performance is executed, the vibration performance is more effective than when the vibration performance is not executed. The ratio of control to an advantageous state is high, and the ratio of control to an advantageous state differs according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect, and the timing of execution between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. are different, the vibration mode is also different, and the light emission mode of the light emission performance is common between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The operating means may be, for example, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, or the like. The first vibration effect may be driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV01 and AKV02 included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03, for example. The second vibration effect may be driving the drive motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 included in the operation part effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13, for example. The vibration effect executing means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in a light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The light emission effect execution means may be the effect control CPU 120 or the like that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern determined in step AKS203, for example. The fact that the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed may be, for example, the reliability of the big hit according to the pattern of the operation part effect. The difference in the rate of being controlled to an advantageous state according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect may be, for example, the reliability of the big hit according to the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The difference in the timing of execution between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect may be, for example, pre-variation start timings AKT01 to AKT03 different from the target variation start timing AKT11. The difference in vibration mode between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect may be, for example, vibration pattern AKV01 different from vibration pattern AKV03. The light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect, for example, when the light emission colors included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13 are white, red, and rainbow colors. etc.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the player pay attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, the target variation start timing AKT11.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display changes to the reach mode may be timing AKT12, for example.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing at which the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing at which the notification effect for informing whether or not the control is to be performed in the advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the second vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting mode is the second light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the second vibration effect may be different between the case where the light emission mode is executed in the first light emission mode and the case where the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second emission mode may be, for example, a case where the emission color is red or iridescent. The difference in the vibration mode may be, for example, the case of the vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode. They are common and may have different vibration modes. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The different vibration mode may be, for example, the vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. , and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the fact that the rate of being controlled to be in an advantageous state is common may be, for example, the case where the reliability of the big hit is 100%. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode are different in the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and even if the vibration mode is different. good. Here, the difference in light emission mode may be, for example, white, red, or rainbow colors, which are different from pink or orange colors. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect according to the timing, thereby improving the game interest.

The second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display changes to the ready-to-reach mode and the second vibration effect executed at the timing to execute the development effect after the variable display changes to the ready-to-reach mode have different vibration modes. good too. Here, the different vibration modes may be, for example, the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The game machine comprises a first light emitting means for causing the operation means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When the second vibration effect is executed in the second vibration effect, the first light emitting means can emit light in the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the second vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emission mode different from the light emission effect according to the predetermined effect. It may be possible to emit light at Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, or the like. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be display of a background image or a character image, for example. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, the image display device 5 or the like. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A line-of-sight guidance effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operation means is provided, and the vibration effect execution means performs the vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing. , the second vibration effect can be executed, regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, the second vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode, and the visual guidance effect executing means is capable of executing the second vibration effect It may be possible to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect without executing the line-of-sight guidance effect at the first timing and before the second vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L and 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3 and T4. A common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, at timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3. If the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3 may be performed.
With such a configuration, the vibration of the operation means can be appropriately recognized, and the interest of the vibration presentation can be sufficiently enhanced.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the first vibration effect in the variable display before the variable display in which the second vibration effect is executed, based on the result of the prefetch determination. Here, the variable display prior to the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage may be, for example, a variable display that is pre-variable.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect associated with the first vibration effect includes a light emitting mode during the first vibration and a light emitting mode during the second vibration different from the light emitting mode during the first vibration, and the light emitting effect is the light emitting mode during the first vibration. The vibration mode of the first vibration effect may be different between when it is executed in and when the light emission effect is executed in the light emission mode during the second vibration. Here, the first vibration-time light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second mode of light emission during vibration may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is red or rainbow. The difference in the vibration mode may be, for example, the case of the vibration pattern AKV01 different from the vibration pattern AKV02.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The light emission mode may be different between the light emission effect accompanying the first vibration effect and the light emission effect accompanying the second vibration effect. Here, the difference in the light emission mode is, for example, when the remaining number of times is other than "0" according to the continuous effect pattern, the light emission color of the operation section effect pattern is different from that when the remaining number of times is "0". I wish I had.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect and improve the game interest.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other characteristic portions. Features that are combined in this way or individual features that are not combined may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to other features.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 9 Game effect lamp 9B1 Lever lamp 9B2 Button lamp 9C Upper frame lamp 9M Left frame lamp 9N Right frame lamp 11 Main board 12 Effect control Substrate 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 32 Movable body 100 Game control microcomputer 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU
131 vibration motor

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
sound output means;
display means;
light emitting means;
a production executing means capable of executing production;
with
The effect executing means is capable of executing a specific effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled,
The display means includes a first display area and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area,
The specific production is
The display means displays a moving image, the sound output means outputs a sound effect, and the light emitting means emits light,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period, in which either an advantageous aspect or a disadvantageous aspect is notified as a result of the production. including
The production executing means is
The effect moving image can be displayed in the first display area,
In the second display area, it is possible to display information display related to the game,
In the first period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at a first speed in the first display area ,
In the second period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed in the first display area . ,
It is possible to execute a still effect of stopping the effect moving image as a result of progressing the effect moving image at the second speed,
In the third period,
When an advantageous mode is notified as a result of the effect, the first display area and the second display area are used without displaying the information display that was displayed in the second display area during the second period. It is possible to notify the effect result of the advantageous mode,
When notifying a disadvantageous aspect as the effect result, the effect result of the disadvantageous aspect is notified using the first display area while the information display that was displayed in the second display area during the second period is displayed. is possible and
In both the first period and the second period, the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed,
In both the first period and the second period, it is possible to change the light emission mode of the light emitting means, and in the second period, the light emitting means emits light at an interval shorter than that in the first period. It is possible to change the light emission mode ,
It is possible to execute a reach effect that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
A special effect can be executed after starting the reach effect,
The operating means is operated at a plurality of timings including a first timing corresponding to the start of the variable display in which the ready-to-win effect is executed and a second timing before the start of the variable display in which the ready-to-win effect is executed. It is possible to execute a predetermined vibration effect to vibrate,
There are a plurality of production modes of the static production, and the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which production mode it is,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images